JP6900611B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention can execute a variable display game in which the identification information is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting area provided in the game area, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the player Related to a game machine that generates a special game state that gives a game value to the player.

Conventionally, a first start port and a second start port are provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can win a prize, and the amount of benefits given to the player based on the winning of the first start port is increased to the second start port. It is a gaming machine in which the amount of benefits given to the player is increased based on the winning of the game, and the first winning passage leading to the first starting port, the second winning passage communicating to the second starting port, and the game ball. Is provided with a distribution means for distributing the ball to the first winning passage and the second winning passage, and a speed adjusting unit provided in the middle of the route of the first winning passage and slowing down the moving speed of the game ball passing through the first winning passage. , The movement time for the game balls distributed to the second winning passage to move to the second starting port is shorter than the moving time for the game balls distributed to the first winning passage to move to the first starting port. There are known gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-046179

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the gaming ball is retained by the retention device (speed adjusting unit), and the moving time for the gaming ball to move to the first starting port is only lengthened, and a further effect can be expected. It wasn't a thing.
An object of the present invention is to effectively improve the effect of the retention device for retaining the game ball.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which the identification information is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting area provided in the game area, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state to be granted
The starting area includes a first starting area in which a game ball launched toward the left side of the game area can win a prize, and a second starting area in which a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area can win a prize. , Including
The second starting area is not an area in which the game ball can be converted into a state in which it is impossible or difficult to win.
A retention means for retaining the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the game region on the upstream side of the second start region.
The retention means can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and a state in which the game ball can win, by operating a movable member having a flow path on the upper surface through which the game ball can flow down. Therefore, it is provided in the ordinary variable winning device in which the movable member operates in response to the result of the normal figure variable display game different from the variable display game.
The variable display game includes a first variable display game and a second variable display game having a higher probability of producing the special result than the first variable display game.
The first variable display game can be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area.
The second variable display game can be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area.
The first variable display game can be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device.

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the retention device for retaining the game ball.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rear component member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining the operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit, which is (a) front view and (b) back view. It is a figure explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit, which is (a) front view and (b) back view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining the operation of the central movable accessory unit, (a) front view, (b) back view. It is a figure explaining the operation of the central movable accessory unit, (a) front view, (b) back view. It is a front view of the special variable winning device. It is a top view of the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the operation of the opening / closing member, and is (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device. It is a back view of the front wall member. It is a figure which shows the rear wall member, is (a) front view, (b) back view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main body part. It is a view from the left which explains the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state, (b) an open state. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing member, is (a) top view, (b) front view. (A) is a front view of the opening / closing member unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. It is a bottom view explaining the operation of the opening / closing member unit, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variable prize-winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning apparatus, (a) top view, (b) perspective view seen from the right. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variation winning apparatus, and is the perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of a game ball in a special variable prize-winning device, and is (a) a closed state and (b) an open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of a game ball when opening an opening / closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the sorting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 2. (A) is a flowchart explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit end processing. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during fluctuation of the normal map, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process transition setting process during display of the normal map. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal electric remaining ball processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the end processing transition setting processing for each normal drawing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the end process per normal figure, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the normal process transition setting process 2 for the normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port signal editing process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of the state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the round effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the interval effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the resetting table of the state suggestion display in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the effect button operation effect process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in the special game state in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the count effect setting process in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the effect point control process in the 3rd modification. It is a top view of the guide part in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in 4th modification, (a) top view, (b) the view seen from the left. It is a figure explaining the special variation winning apparatus in 4th modification, (a) top view, (b) the view seen from the left. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning apparatus in the 5th modification. It is a back view of the rear wall member in the 5th modification. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the main body part in 5th modification. It is a perspective view seen from the back surface side of the main body part in 5th modification, (a) the door part is a blocking state, and (b) the door part is an allowable state. It is a back view of the main body part in the 5th modification, (a) the door part is a blocking state, and (b) the door part is an allowable state. In the fifth modification, (a) a front view of the main body, (b) a cross-sectional view of BB in a blocked state, and (c) a cross-sectional view of BB in a permissible state of the door. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the gaming machine in 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation state of the special variation winning apparatus in 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area switch monitoring process in 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing in 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control processing in 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the guide flow path in the 5th modification, (a) the back view of the rear wall member, (b) the enlarged view of the bent portion in the 1st aspect, (c) the second. It is an enlarged view of the bent part in the aspect of. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the sixth modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the sixth modification. It is a front view explaining the modification of the game board in the sixth modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the image on the reflection surface in 7th modification. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variation winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variation winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a game state transition diagram which shows an example of the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the operation of the ordinary variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, and various times. It is a table which shows an example of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, and the probability variation probability in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port switch common processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening variation number update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit middle processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32). In addition, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is located on the lower right side of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Below the center case 40 are the first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and the second special figure changing display that give the start conditions of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A winning device 90 is provided, which includes a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 can rotate about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the direction of tilting changes depending on the weight of the inflowing game ball. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball winning the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32), and the game ball winning the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32). Detected by. Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It is almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 32) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the game ball flowing downward is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

The information display device 630 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory, which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game. It is provided with a second information display unit that displays the number of. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the 1st special figure variable display game is displayed by the 4th symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the 1st to 3rd symbols on the display device 41. The decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Display A fourth information display unit for displaying a game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column form the first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column form the second information display unit. Further, one lower light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and one lower light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and a design is provided so that the two light emitting members are related to each other around each information display unit. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. Further, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed so that they can be seen to be independent of each other. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so as not to spoil the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not affixed with a sticker or the like, but is molded into a member constituting the guide portion 616, so that labor and cost in manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, but depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 990 is closed from the closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening / closing member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (second special gaming state). During the small hit game state (first special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined value. The game value (prize ball) is given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to reach the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. By launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. It has become.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a prize is given to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the general figure start gate 34, which form a special figure variable display game. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game as a trigger and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. It is provided with a special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for games and various displays composed of LED lamps. The various indicators include a special figure 1 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device is opened and closed), a first game status display unit that notifies whether the time is shortened (during normal electric support, during a specific game state), left. A second game state display unit is included to notify the player of the hitting method (normal hitting) and the right-handed hitting method (the hitting method corresponding to the game state), which is advantageous to the player. In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a normal map variation display game. Includes a normal map display for the game and a normal map hold display for notifying the start memory of the game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 variable display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variable display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 variable display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variable display game.

During the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, the normal map display repeats the normal map fluctuation display in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the normal map variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the normal map fluctuation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (normal map, normal symbol) for displaying the normal map variation display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second start memories (second hold number), which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The normal figure hold indicator displays the number of normal figure start memories (the number of normal figure hold), which is the execution right of the normal figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units.

When the round display unit is not in the special game state, all the light emitting units are turned off, and during the special game state, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. The first game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur, and the time reduction state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (normal hitting), and is more than left-handed. When right-handed is more advantageous for the player (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

Next, the details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40, and also constitutes a game board. A rear component 700 to which various members necessary for 30 are attached is provided.

The front component 600 is attached to the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 by being fitted from the front side. This front component has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into the front-rear penetrating opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80, and is formed with a peripheral wall 611 forming a front side portion of the inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. A plate-shaped brim-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 is provided at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

The portion of the mounting portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 from the front side. It extends outward from the peripheral edge, and its back surface comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front-rear position of the front component 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612 so that the front component 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface thereof is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is formed with screw holes, screwed portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

A regulation wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610, except for a portion where a stage portion 620, a warp flow path forming member 614, and a normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, are arranged. The regulation wall 613 is forward of the mounting portion 612 by the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is designed to be extended. Therefore, by attaching the front component 600 to the predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 located on the front side of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. It is designed to regulate the inflow into the case 40. As a result, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured, and the number of inflows of game balls into the stage unit 620 is limited.

Further, a warp flow forming a warp flow path that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides the game ball to the stage portion 620 on the side portion on the left side when viewed from the front surface side of the base member 610. A road forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the mounting portion 612, and has a front-rear width of the game area 32 with respect to the mounting portion 612 (a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30 from the front of the game board body 80). The width to the back side of the glass) extends forward. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the regulation wall 613 attached so as to extend forward from the attachment portion 612 on the left side portion when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a tubular flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. It is possible to accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32. This upstream end forms the inflow port of the warp flow path. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. The downstream end is opened rearward to guide the game ball to the left end of the stage 620.

The stage portion 620 allows the game ball to roll back and forth and left and right, and both the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central portion directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward, but is lower than both the left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp flow path flows into the stage portion 620 from the left end and rolls in the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball that bounces below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, inclined surfaces 621 that descend forward are formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the central portion that protrudes upward. The inclined surface 621 guides the game ball whose flow force is weakened on the stage portion 620 from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the game region 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow path 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward extends at the apex of the central portion protruding upward. It is formed. This flow path 622 has a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow path 622 is guided rearward and flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into an induction flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620. The guide flow path 623 is a flow path that descends forward, and the downstream end is located directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, so that the guide flow path 623 flows into the winning device 90 with a high probability.

Further, on the right side when viewed from the front side of the front component 600, a normal drawing start gate 34 through which the game ball can pass is provided up and down. The starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, a normal variable winning device 37 including a movable member 37b is provided below the normal drawing start gate 34. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component 600 and flows into a discharge flow path (not shown). Further, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a normal electric solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the game ball that flows downward on the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information related to the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 that opens forward, and the rear base member 710 has a screw hole or a screw. Stops, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, etc. are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a collar-shaped fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is designated on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 penetrating back and forth is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. The through hole 715 makes the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 visible.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. By attaching the display device 41 so that the display surface is on the front side, the image of the display surface can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with the liquid crystal display device, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

Inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710, a lower movable accessory unit 730, an upper movable accessory unit 800, and a central movable accessory unit 880 are provided, which form a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. ing.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged below the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 that imitate a nobori and a second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd. The 1 lower movable member 740, 741 and the 2nd lower movable member 770 can be operated so as to appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged on the front side as a base portion for attaching a drive mechanism and various members for operating the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770. It includes a base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 arranged in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 arranged on the back surface side.

The motor 734, which is a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right side when viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is installed along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, which are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 that can rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction and a second gear 737 that meshes with the first gear 735 and can rotate around an axis along the front-rear direction. It is transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and the first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward on the front side. It is provided to do so.

Further, the second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and the second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back surface side. It is provided in. As will be described later, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 drive the motor 734 in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the first drive shaft 736 and operates. When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second drive shaft 738. Is configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 is provided with a bearing portion 742 at the lower end portion, and the bearing portion 742 is provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. It is rotatably supported by the bearing. The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 also has a bearing portion 743 at the lower end portion, and the bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotation shaft 752 along the front-rear direction provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732. It is bearing as possible. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740, which is pivotally supported by the left rotating shaft 751 when viewed from the front, are doubled in the front-rear direction, and the driving force from the motor 734 is provided by the front gear. It is supposed to receive. The gear on the rear side transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and one motor 734 is used to transmit the driving force to the two first lower movable members 740. 741 can operate at the same time.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740, which is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front, is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-rear direction. It meshes with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided on the upper portion of a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732. By moving the slide member 760 left and right, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-shaped member, and the plate surface is arranged along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, and a support shaft that protrudes forward and is formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 on the supported portion 762. By inserting the 754, it is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760, so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to fall forward.

Further, the slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating back and forth. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end portion of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front surface side. The first drive shaft 736 provided in the first gear 735 is inserted into the through hole 763 from the rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion between the arcuate portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 763 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

When the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side from this initial state, the first drive shaft 736 moves the straight portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, so that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward. The display device 41 appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is the opposite of the above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when the second lower movable member 770 is returned from the operating state to the initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 is provided with a rotation shaft 771 along the front-rear direction at the lower end portion, and the rotation shafts are the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. It is rotatably supported by. Further, a linear through hole 772 penetrating back and forth is formed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 771. The through hole 772 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending from the left end portion of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front surface side in the state shown in FIG. A second drive shaft 738 provided in the second gear 737 is inserted into the through hole 772 from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion between the arcuate portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arcuate portion of the through hole 772 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so that the second gear 737 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes up the second lower movable member 770 and the through hole 772 Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is the opposite of the above. As described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 is not pressed and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in a state where the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display for emphasizing the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect may be displayed in the same manner even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. The display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion of the second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd so that it can be decorated by light emission. In addition, the letters "Dearuka" also emit light. Each of these four characters emits light independently, but for "ru", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light more independently. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 it is possible to make only the "de" part and the "no" part in "le" emit light and display "dere". There is. By dividing the characters and making it possible to display different information in this way, it is possible to perform a novel effect. It should be noted that the display of "dere" notifies that the dere mode is one of the plurality of production modes. By notifying the effect mode by the display on the movable member in this way, it is possible to convey the set effect mode to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 that imitates a tiger's hand, and these first upper movable members The effect is produced by operating the 848 and the second upper movable member 860.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 that can move in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. .. The base member 801 has a U-shape when viewed from the front side, and the upper base portion 802 arranged above the through hole 715 and the left base portion arranged to the left when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715. It is composed of 803 and a right base portion 804 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a drive mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down. Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm 808 is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm 808. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820, and by driving the motor 807, the link member 830 can be operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 arranged on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A drive unit 850 that is arranged on the back surface side of the unit 841 to drive the first upper movable member and the second upper movable member, a back surface cover 849 that covers the back surface of the unit base unit 841 from behind the drive unit 850, and a back surface cover 849. It is provided with a guided member 842 fixed to the back surface of the above and guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link member 830 is rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and is arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 is a rotation shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 that extends forward along the front-rear direction or a rotation shaft provided on the right base portion 804 that extends forward along the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which the 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is rotatably supported by a left base portion 803 or a right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole through which a drive shaft 809 provided in the arm 808 of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and drives the motor 807 to rotate the arm 808. By doing so, the drive shaft 809 is moved along the first guide portion 832 to rotate the link member 830 up and down.

Further, at the other end of the link member 830 facing the one end where the bearing portion 831 is provided, a connecting shaft 833 for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend rearward. ing. Further, the link member 830 is a second guide portion which is a long hole through which a support shaft 861 provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. The 834 is formed, and the second guide portion 834 guides and supports one end of the second upper movable member 860.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion 844 and a supported portion 845 extending from the main body portion 844 to the left and right. A third guide portion 846, which is an elongated hole that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right, is formed in the supported portion 845, and the connecting shaft 833 of the link member 830 can slide in the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, in the center of the main body portion 844, an insertion portion 847 through which a drive shaft (not shown) extending rearward from the center of the circular first upper movable member 848 can be inserted is formed. The insertion portion 847 rotatably supports the first upper movable member 848 by rotatably supporting the inserted drive shaft.

The drive unit 850 includes a motor 851 that serves as a drive source, a rotary drive unit 852 that is connected to the first upper movable member 848, and a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860. By driving the motor 851, the rotation drive unit 852 rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction. Further, one end of the drive arm 853 is connected to a connection shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 that is rotated by driving the motor 851, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right by driving the motor 851. It has become like.

The drive shaft of the first upper movable member 848 inserted through the insertion portion 847 of the unit base portion 841 is connected to the rotation center of the rotation drive unit 852, and the drive shaft is rotated by the rotation of the rotation drive unit 852. First, the movable member 848 is designed to rotate. A connection shaft 862 provided on the back surface of the other end of the second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and the drive arm 853 swings left and right to move the second upper movable member 860. The member 860 swings left and right.

Further, the back surface cover 849 is fixed to the back surface side of the unit base portion 841 so as to cover the drive portion 850. A guided member 842 is fixed to the back surface of the back surface cover 849, whereby the guided member 842 and the unit base portion 841 are fixed to each other. The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and is guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 at the left and right end portions. Section 843 is provided.

10 to 12 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. Some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 10 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end of the operating range, and FIGS. 11 and 12 show an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range. In the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm 808 toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 rotates downward and the movable member unit 820. Moves downwards. When the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end of the rotating range as shown in FIG. 11A, and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end of the rotating range. Is located in. That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms the first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body. , And these constitute the first effect device.

Further, when the drive unit 850 is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. As shown in 12, the first upper movable member 848 is repeatedly moved to the left and right from the state separated from the movable member 848. When the second upper movable member 860 is closer to the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. 11A, the connecting shaft 856 provided on the back surface of the gear 855 is provided as shown in FIG. 11B. The drive arm 853 is brought closer to each other, and the second upper movable member 860 is pulled toward the first upper movable member 848. When the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connecting shaft 856 pushes the drive arm outward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates so as to separate from the first upper movable member 848.

When the second upper movable member 860 is farthest from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the connecting shaft provided on the back surface of the gear 855 as shown in FIG. 12 (b). The 856 is in the state of being the most distant from each other, and the drive arm 853 is in the state of being the most distant from the first upper movable member 848 of the second upper movable member 860. When the gear 855 rotates from this state, the connecting shaft 856 pulls the drive arm inward, and the second upper movable member 860 operates so as to approach the first upper movable member 848. As the gear 855 continues to rotate in one direction, this operation is repeated and the second upper movable member 860 moves left and right. That is, the second upper movable member 860 forms a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive unit 850 does not form a second drive mechanism unit for operating the second effect movable body. These constitute the second effect device.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at both the initial position shown in FIG. 10 and the post-operation position shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, with the link member 830 covered. It is designed to operate. By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 that operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830, and simply the operation. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a non-decorative member. Further, especially at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 covers the link member 830 so as not to be visible to the player. As a result, unnecessary parts cannot be seen by the player in the initial position which occupies most of the game, and the decorativeness is improved.

From the above, in the gaming machine 10 that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the effect related to the game is controlled. The effect control means (effect control device 300), the first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and the second effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) that are controlled by the effect control means and operate to produce an effect related to the game. The first effect device includes a first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and includes an effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850). A second effect movable body including a first drive mechanism unit (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device can perform a predetermined effect operation. (Second upper movable member 860) and a second drive mechanism unit (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body are provided, and the second effect movable body covers the first drive mechanism unit. It will be arranged.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism unit, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced. Can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism unit with the second effect movable body that operates in particular, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism unit. , A higher hiding effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a non-moving decorative member.

Further, in the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860), the first drive mechanism unit (link member 830) plays a game in a state where at least the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is in the initial position. It is covered so that it cannot be seen by anyone. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the initial position which occupies most of the game, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates so that a plurality of central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. This is what makes the production.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. Further, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 arranged and operated on the upper front surface of the movable effect base member 881, and the third arranged and operated on the lower front surface of the movable effect base member 881. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

In the movable effect base member 881, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41. In this portion, the operation of the first rotating shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guide portion 883, which is an elongated hole penetrating the front and rear for the purpose, is provided. Further, a second rotating shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the second central movable effect member, and front and rear for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member. A second guide portion 885, which is an elongated hole penetrating the hole, is provided.

Then, on the right side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41, a drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotation shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Further, in the movable effect base member 881, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located below the display device 41. In this portion, the operation of the third rotating shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guide portion 892, which is an elongated hole penetrating the front and rear for the purpose, is provided. Further, the fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and the front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member. A fourth guide portion 894, which is an elongated hole penetrating the hole, is provided. A motor forming a drive source for operating the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. 895 is provided.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged on the upper right side includes a decorative portion 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, a first bearing portion 902 is provided which penetrates before and after the first rotation shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is the first. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first fan-shaped gear 903 and a second fan-shaped gear 904 centered on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first fan-shaped gear 903 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating the front and rear. There is. Then, the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with the gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886.

Further, the second fan-shaped gear 904 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second fan-shaped gear 904 meshes with a third fan-shaped gear 913 provided on the second central movable effect member 910 arranged adjacent to the left side of the first central movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first fan-shaped gear 903 is transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second fan-shaped gear 904. Further, on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900, a guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883, and when the first central movable effect member 900 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883. This enables the smooth operation of the first central movable effect member 900.

The second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left portion includes a decorative portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, a second bearing portion 912 is provided which penetrates before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted, and the second central movable effect member 910 is the second. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third fan-shaped gear 913 centered on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third fan-shaped gear 913 meshes with the second fan-shaped gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is inserted through the second guide portion 885, and when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885. This enables smooth operation of the second central movable effect member 910.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided. The engaging portion 915 faces the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through the penetrating portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating the front and rear. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 14B, one end of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged on the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked to a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is urged upward. It has become like. As a result, the urging force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the operating range, and downwards. The operated first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 assist in returning to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left portion includes a decorative portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, a third bearing portion 922 is provided which penetrates before and after the third rotation shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is the third. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a fan-shaped fourth fan-shaped gear 923 and a fifth fan-shaped gear 924 centered on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth fan-shaped gear 923 meshes with the gear of the motor 895 arranged at the lower left of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.

Further, the fifth fan-shaped gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth fan-shaped gear 924 meshes with the sixth fan-shaped gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth fan-shaped gear 923 is transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth fan-shaped gear 924. Further, on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is inserted through the third guide portion 892, and when the third central movable effect member 920 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892. This enables the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right portion includes a decorative portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a fourth bearing portion 932 is provided which penetrates before and after the fourth rotation shaft 893 is inserted, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is the fourth. It is rotatably supported around the moving shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth fan-shaped gear 933 and a seventh fan-shaped gear 934 centered on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth fan-shaped gear 933 meshes with the fifth fan-shaped gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. Further, on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 935 is inserted through the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894. This enables the smooth operation of the fourth central movable effect member 930.

Further, the seventh sector gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh fan-shaped gear 934 meshes with the eighth fan-shaped gear 942 provided in the urging mechanism 940 arranged at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The urging mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction and includes an eighth fan-shaped gear 942. The urging mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left side from the rotation axis when viewed from the front surface side, and is urged downward (counterclockwise) by an urging member (not shown). As a result, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the operating range. Therefore, the urging force by the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 in the initial position, and also assists the third central movable effect member 920 and the third central movable effect member 920 that have moved upward. The fourth central movable effect member 930 assists when returning to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into the initial state shown in FIG. 14 and the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 14, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are at the initial positions which are the upper ends of the operating range, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Is at the initial position at the lower end of the operating range, and is in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the substantially display device 41. From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 rotate so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 15, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth center. The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end faces of the respective decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 face each other and approach the end faces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, and form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the display device 41 can be visually recognized through the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931.

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 16 to 18, the special variation winning device 38 is arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and the flow path rear wall 962. It is sandwiched between the flow path front wall 952 and provided with a flow path 38f through which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a row toward the left.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow path 38f is composed of an opening / closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a), the opening / closing member 990 protrudes forward and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d), and FIG. 18 (b). As shown in the above, it is possible to evacuate to the rear and convert it into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening 38d. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, passes through the large winning opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. It is designed to flow into the big prize opening. When the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 19, the special variation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, and a main body portion 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached. A cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body 970 is provided.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partly capable of transmitting light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decorative means, and it is possible to decorate the special variable winning device 38 with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the batch display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of front wall projecting portions 954 projecting rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952. The front wall protrusion 954 is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is slightly upstream of the protrusion 992 in front of each of the plurality of protrusions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990. It is provided so as to be located in. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. By locating the front wall protrusion 954 slightly upstream, the game ball flowing down to the left is guided backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further backward by the protrusion 992. It is designed to effectively guide the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 20, on the back surface side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 are provided. The function of the extending wall 953 is different depending on the place where the extension wall is provided. A guide flow path forming portion 953c that forms a guide flow path 955 that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d that forms a mounting portion 956 that mounts a large winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 are formed. It has a function as a general winning opening forming portion 953e and a peripheral wall 953f for preventing the game ball flowing down around the special variable winning device 38 from entering the inside.

The bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f is an inclined surface inclined to the right side when viewed from the back surface side. Further, the large winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the large winning opening 38d into the guide flow path 955. Game balls can flow into the guidance flow path 955 in a row, and a large winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion into the guidance flow path 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 38d will flow into the induction flow path 955 after being detected by the large winning opening switch 38a. The guidance flow path 955 formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 953c is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the large winning opening 38d to the back surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is rearward on the back surface of the front surface portion 951. Ribs 957 for guiding to are formed. Further, the general winning opening forming portion 953e forms a general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning device 38. A rib 958 for guiding the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 35 to the rear is formed on the back surface of the front surface portion 951.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 38f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating the front and rear for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 17, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular columnar projecting portion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the flow path 38f in the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball can be reliably provided. It becomes possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 21, the guide flow path 955 communicates with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 at the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the guide flow path 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating back and forth is formed in. Further, above the guide flow path 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed which penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, on the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 on which the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is moved to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a is formed so as to communicate the general winning port flow path 966 to be guided to the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 21B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. The function of the extending wall 967 is different depending on the place where the wall is provided, and the guide flow path forming portion 967a forming the guide flow path 955, the general winning port flow path forming portion 967b forming the general winning port flow path 966, and the general winning port flow path forming portion 967b. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c forming the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide flow path forming portion 967a forms the guide flow path 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back surface side downward. Further, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening flow path forming portion 967b forms the general winning opening flow path 966 so as to guide the game ball guided downward from the penetrating portion 966a to the back surface side. Further, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed to match the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the special variable winning device 38 is attached, and the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 22, the main body portion 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 that faces the guide flow path forming portion 967a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms the rear wall of the guide flow path 955. In the rear wall portion 972, at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, a game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is introduced into the guiding flow path 955. A rib 973 that guides to the right along the line is formed. Further, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating back and forth is formed at a position of the rear wall portion 972 facing the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The gaming ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 955 is guided backward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970, and is guided to the outside of the gaming machine. Is designed to flow into the discharge channel.

Further, a penetration that guides a game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 through a portion of the rear wall member 960 facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966. Part 975 is formed. The gaming ball that has flowed down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 through the penetrating portion 975, is detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

Further, an opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the front and rear of the main body portion 970, and can come into contact with the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990 to guide and support the opening / closing member 990. The guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening / closing member unit 980 having an opening / closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990.

The opening / closing member unit 980 is in a state in which the opening / closing member 990 is projected forward as shown in FIG. 23A and the special variation winning device 38 is closed, and as shown in FIG. 23B, the opening / closing member unit 980 is opened / closed. The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened with the member 990 retracted rearward. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the large winning opening 38d via the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening / closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 24A, the opening / closing member 990 is formed as a flow path forming portion 991 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f by lowering the front end portion extending upward of the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface. ing.

The flow path forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of protruding portions 992 protruding upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right can be smoothly guided backward toward the recess 993. Further, the downstream side surface of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side so that when the game ball flowing forward from the recess 993 comes into contact, the side surface can be guided to the downstream side.

Further, a recess 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is one step lower and faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the concave portion 993 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is set so that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed diagonally so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the recess 993. There is.

That is, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as a protrusion 992 and a recess 993. As will be described later, such undulations allow the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for a long time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an oblique surface that descends to the left side, so that the game ball flows down toward the left side. Further, sliding portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the opening / closing member 990 is placed on the holding portion 982 by abutting on the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this way, when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, when a game ball exists between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, the game ball is moved upward. Alternatively, the game ball can be released downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a connecting portion 995 to which a drive arm 983 for transmitting a driving force from the large winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is connected is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 25B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a penetrating portion 982a through which a connecting pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connecting pin 983a is an opening / closing member through the penetrating portion 982a. It is connected to the connection portion 995 of the 990. Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b located on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extending along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 along the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 26, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotation shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and is rotatable about the rotation shaft 983b. The rotation shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 and is rotatably held (see FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is located at the front end of the rotation range. .. In this state, the drive arm 983 is most rotated clockwise when viewed from the back surface side with the rotation shaft 983b as the center, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When the special variable winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive shaft 38g of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is retracted so that the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back side with the rotation shaft 983b as the center. Rotating in the direction, the connecting pin 983a is moved backward so that the opening / closing member 990 is retracted backward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26B, the special variable winning device 38 is opened. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the operation opposite to the above operation is performed.

27 to 30 show the flow mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device 38. In addition, in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The game ball flowing down the flow path 38f from right to left is first guided diagonally forward by the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided diagonally rearward by the front wall protrusion 954 and diagonally rearward by the protrusion 992 of the opening / closing member 990, and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is guided diagonally forward again by the downstream side surface of the recess 993 formed diagonally toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

After that, the guidance diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and the guidance diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f meanders back and forth. It will flow down while. As a result, the time to stay on the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows down linearly. It will be. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30A, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short. At that time, as shown in FIG. 30B, there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 will fall and win the big prize opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player will win the prize. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for. It is preferable to secure the time required for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the round of short opening. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the protruding portion 992 formed in the opening / closing member 990. As shown in 31 (b), it bounces and is guided away from the grand prize opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the grand prize opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game ball can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall without contacting the protrusions 992 through these intervals. The opening time of the special variable winning device 38 in the case of short opening, which will be described later, is a time during which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protrusion 992 or the like can flow into the large winning opening 38d as described above. ing. As a result, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the large winning opening 38d.

By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this way, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The flow path 38f is provided with a front wall protrusion 954, a rear wall protrusion 964, a protrusion 992, and a recess 993 as undulations, but other than these may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation, and the game ball may meander and flow down along the groove. Further, as undulations, rib-shaped protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the flow direction, so that when the game ball flows down, it flows down while being moved in the vertical direction by the protrusions and grooves. You can do it.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). 97) A game in which a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine is provided with a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. , The opening and closing member that allows the game ball to win from the opening facing upward, closes the opening to make it impossible to win the game ball in the closed state, and opens the opening to enable the winning of the game ball in the open state. The 990 is provided so that the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portion 992, recess 993) on the upper surface, as compared with the case where there is no such undulation. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, around the flow path 38f formed by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, contact portions (front wall protrusion 954, rear wall protrusion 964) are provided so that the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Will be there. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. it can.

Further, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right ends on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 to the other, and the undulations formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 move the flowing game ball back and forth. It will be formed to meander. Therefore, the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes long, the decrease of the game ball in the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. However, in the closed state, the upper surface is parallel so as to cover the large winning opening 38d, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened. May be configured to rotate downward.

Further, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The special variable winning device 38 is provided, which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. A game ball can be won from the facing opening, and in the closed state, it protrudes forward to close the opening, making it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state, it retracts backward and opens the opening to win the game ball. An opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided so as to enable the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening / closing member 990 has undulations (protruding portion 992) on the upper surface. , Recess 993) is provided so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 for a longer time than when there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 faces the front end. Therefore, the inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced.

Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member for a longer time than when there is no undulation. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of games and enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is a flat surface along the slide direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, which enhances the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal for the CPU 111A with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving operation state (general power support state)), the number of start memories, etc., from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables, any one of them. Select and acquire the fluctuation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 are connected to these switches. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the input is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to a voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body which is connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 33.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and an information display device 630. , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , 1st start winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 from the game area 32. It is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning openings is increased according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball driven into the inside passes through the inside of the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the holding display of the general drawing of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the normal map variation display game, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the normal map display provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order of the above, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode on the solenoid display according to the type of hit is stopped. In addition to displaying the display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 is set. In addition to storing in the limit, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the prizes in the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Remember in. Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display. Is displayed. Further, it is also displayed on the information display device 630.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 is in a state where the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. A process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed by comparing the generated random value for jackpot determination with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) and the information display device 630 correspond to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, Displaying a variable display of decorative special figures (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) Performs processing to display the game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the information display device 630, the light emitting member blinks during the variation display, and when the stop time is reached, the light emitting member blinks the light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by the decorative special symbol (fourth symbol) composed of the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the information display device 630 is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game is entered into the large winning opening. Controls to allow the inflow of balls. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is awarded in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol, opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) for the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

In addition, the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and are non-contact to detect a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), and it is normal. If (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 35, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 35 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 35, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, and other commands) If so, send multiple commands such as the recovery screen command). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time (customer waiting demo screen is displayed). For example, (for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as (command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 36 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 37 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number update process is completed.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there are also gaming machines in which the initial random number of the winning symbol does not exist.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S105), the random number update process 1 (step S106), and the random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a. In addition, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S110) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverting bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is completed.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.
Further, the inverted bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the inverted bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data have the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128, S133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) until the second reading elapses (step S145).

When the delay time elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is set as a confirmation bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second readings (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state of this time (step S154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state of this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Ends the switch read process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous read to generate a signal. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has changed, but if this is done, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be possible. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is an output port for digit / external information output. Output to 136 (step S166).
After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, various indicators provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display, the special figure 1 hold display, and the special figure 2 hold. The display, the normal drawing hold display, the round display, and the second game status display are dynamically lit.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S170), and the combined data is combined. It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for turning on the payout busy signal (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure, and will be backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 43 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step S213). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). When the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal figure hit random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the hit symbol random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 44 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and both of them are to be updated in the random number update process 2. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is "1", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is "2", the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variable pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the game microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing the DRAM, and instead. In addition, a counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this). Is set to the mask update value obtained by adding "1" to "masked value"), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S236; N). Step S238) and step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Proceed to step S242. When the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step). S243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1. It is saved in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number region is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) are displayed on the effect random number update table. , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is opened. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening and to detect a normal winning.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information on the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect the normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, and general winning opening 35 winning opening switch 35a) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S307), and a winning opening is won. The winning number counter update process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter of is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Status monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", status monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring status according to the value of the status scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 46 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to fraudulently open the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of the winning slot switch to be error-monitored, but the number of fraud occurrences is defined to be different for each type of winning slot switch. You can also do it. The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won after passing the mark or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (For example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step S327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning ball is performed. Do. Then, if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S334), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step S337), the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 47 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308, S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch is checked. Determine (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether or not it overflows (step S355). When no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). When an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning slot switch / gaming machine status monitoring table prepared by the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, a lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, a lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and a signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error-type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S372; Y) is a state indicating that the error-type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step S379; N). Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S381). Step S383).

If the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine status check process ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S384) to prepare. The determined state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 49 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396). When the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). , It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). Further, when the value of the busy signal state region matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

This process sets the busy signal status based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time. It is difficult to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and the winning is given. Based on special figure variation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the game.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has been up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining sphere processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. To do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the first start port (first start winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port, which is the starting port in FIG. 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud has occurred when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that no fraudulent electric power is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure start port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and subsequent processes are performed.

Next, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A116), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the third starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a prize in the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and the effect command setting process (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (second starting winning opening 97) must be hit left to win a prize, and the normal variable winning device 37 must be hit right. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize at the third starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect control device 300 to perform a right-handed instruction.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special figure start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning opening). Of the ports 97), the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A131), and among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the start port to be monitored is set. It is determined whether or not the switch has an input (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A135). Then, of the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening of the monitored target is won. Yes information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of times the winning start port switch to be monitored is won. The number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information about the game is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the number of outputs overflows. (Step A143).
When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, and the save is not performed.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. Judgment (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A145; Y). Step A146), prepare the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the target start port winning flag. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 is RWM. Save in the jackpot random number storage area of (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the case of the present embodiment) are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that the prize has not been won in the first starting port (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, in step A155, when it is determined that the prize is won in the first starting port (step A155; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and the small hit symbol of RWM is extracted. Save in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the variable order flag storage area (any place from hold 1 to 8) corresponding to the total of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area is calculated. The variation order flag of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A159), the special figure hold information determination process (step A160) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is completed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the right to execute a variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first sets various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, which is the starting opening of FIG. 1, up to a predetermined number. The second start is stored as a start memory, and various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the starting openings of the special figure 2, up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A160) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 54, first, a jackpot determination process (step A161) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A165).
If it is determined in step A165 that the prize is not won in the first starting port (step A165; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A165; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to the process of step A171.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is provided. It is acquired (step A169), and the process proceeds to step A171.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A172). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A174).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A176), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time for determining the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A201). .. If the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step). A202).

If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the processing is being performed during the small hit (step A203). ). If the process is in the middle of a small hit (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205. Then, "0" is set in the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch (step A206).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed. It is determined whether it is inside (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is won a large prize. It is added to the number of mouth counts (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning mouth counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A219). Step A220), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress (step A221). When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are both “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variation order flag storage area (for a total of 1 hold number). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation shown in FIG. 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that this change is the change of special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, the special figure 1 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A304, a command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorative special figure hold number command) is prepared.

On the other hand, in step A303, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the number of reserved special figures 2. The decoration special figure hold number command to be performed is prepared (step A307), the effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. At this point, the special figure 2 hold number has not been updated by -1, but in step A307, a command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decorative special figure hold number command) is prepared.

Further, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A301; Y). In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and the effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, "0" for the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure is The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed hit flag 1 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 52 ms) is saved (step A333), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 57 for the second start memory. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 58, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure is shown. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 104 msec) is saved (step A353), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A364). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A365) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A365) is a jackpot (step A366; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A362 (step A367). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A368) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A361. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A372). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 61 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing, and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of order. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A383).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A365) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 62 shows the small hit determination process (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit judgment is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit judgment. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of order, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is an outlier, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in Special Figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be probabilistic depending on whether or not the game state is probabilistic. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode of the above, or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A410; Y), the special figure 1 small hit The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning opening). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and change pattern setting process (steps A174, A326, A346) in special figure 2 change start will be described. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step). A472), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (step A474), and if it is out of alignment (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to perform step A477. Move to processing. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 67 shows the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) of, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

In this sorting process, first, the data at the beginning of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A472, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Checks if is an unsorted code (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is obtained. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is completed.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And the second half fluctuation selection table) and the first distribution value specified in the first half fluctuation selection table) are acquired (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).
Then, in step A2205, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2207), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 68 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.
On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new random number is generated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter. Perform processing.
That is, a new distribution value is obtained by acquiring the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) (step A2303), and then subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table).
Then, in step A2305, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 67 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 68 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Because they are different in that, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A327, A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the variation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about the pattern and a stop information command including information about the extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, “2” related to the processing during display of the special figure is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the special symbol 2) is saved. (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Initial value of the control timer. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that it is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A708). The round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). When it is determined that A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. It is saved in the upper limit value area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). A717) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudden probability))), and the big hit without a big hit (big winning opening). When the opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability change (sudden probability)), it turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A726), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command is set. The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step). A736) is performed, the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies and the like.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update processing (steps A726, A735) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (in a high probability state) (step A751). When the special figure is in high probability (step A751; Y), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether the time is shortened (step A752). Then, when the time is not shortened (step A752; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. When the time is being shortened (step A752; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A754).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A754; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is set to the test signal output data area. Save.

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A759). Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. In order to turn off the lights, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, for example. ..

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). If the remaining number of rotations of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782). The effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), and the effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), the effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is completed. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotation speed of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A791), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A792).

Next, the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal is ON (output by big hit + small hit) and 4 big hit signals are ON (output by big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special The symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). It should be noted that even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, clear the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A795), save the number without time reduction in the game state display number area (step A796), and set the normal game mode flag. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is turned off in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. (Step A799), and save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the remaining rotation speed area of the effect is cleared (step A804), and the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). .. Then, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit) is turned on. In order to make the game state display number 2, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process 1, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing. Save to the number area (step A812).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit output). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A903).

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A907), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is completed.
When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A908), perform the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening, and end the fanfare / interval process.

Here, in the present embodiment, as jackpot patterns, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), and 4R probability variation (all short open) is set. The probability change is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, 16R probability change A data and open switching judgment value "0", 16R probability change B data and open switching judgment value "4", 16R normal A data and open switching judgment value "0", The 16R normal B data and the open switching determination value “4” and the 4R probability variation data and the open switching determination value “0” are stored in association with each other. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing while the big winning opening is open]
FIG. 78 shows the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In this process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A911). Step A912). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the winning opening count area (step A914). Then, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, when it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the game state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). The interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening is being opened. End the process.

If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step). A1006), the interval command is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. To do.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. The ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the time is prepared (step A1009), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the grand prize opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed. The process is finished while the big winning opening is open.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening solenoid remains. End the ball processing transition setting processing.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109. Move to the processing of. Further, when the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that the subsequent rounds will be short-open rounds. Specifically, as jackpot patterns, 16R probability variation A (all long open), 16R probability variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B ( When any of 1 to 4R is long open and 5 to 16R is short open) is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the jackpot round, and at the 4th round. Execute the round continuous notification effect. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is notified that the long open will continue in the round continuous notification effect, and the big winning opening will be long open even in the 5th and subsequent rounds. Will be released at. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank-down effect is performed in the round continuous notification effect, resulting in short open. It will be notified that the big prize opening will be opened with a short opening in the 5th and subsequent rounds.

If the large winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the remaining ball of the winning opening. To finish.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area for storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step). A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the big winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A1113). After that, the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed to end the jackpot remaining ball processing.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 82 shows the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1122).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval is set. The intermediate process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 83 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). After that, a signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is highly probable after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set when the state is reached (step A1201).

If the data is not high probability data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and if the data is high probability data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). ), The probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and the command setting process (step A1205) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1208), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and the command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A1223), and the Tokuzu low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1225), the time reduction fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the jackpot ends. The setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100 times) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 86 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1235), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period of time. It serves as a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, , The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the small hit fanfare medium processing, the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, “8” related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is used as the special figure game processing. Save to the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1) is saved. The operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit medium processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed to perform the small hit operation transition setting process. End the hit processing.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high probability of special figure. It is determined whether the flag is related to (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time is shortened.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit operation transition setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hit medium control pointer).

In step A1411, when the control pointers are "0", "2", and "4", the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). The off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.
Further, in step A1411, when the control pointers are "1", "3", and "5", the large winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit medium control pointer is sequentially set at the end of opening and the end of closing. Will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "0" and 1 At the end of the first 1500ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500ms closing to the second 200ms opening), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "1" and the second 200ms opening is opened. The small hit medium control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hit medium control is updated at the end of the third 200 msec opening. The pointer is updated to "4", and the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "6", and after the elapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec, it is closed for 2000 msec, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) in the above-mentioned small hit middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing number. Save to the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is used as the special figure game process. Save to the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting process is completed. ..

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the migration information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610). The effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), and the effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed, and then the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (in the time reduction state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.
If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step). A1621), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure is usually used. The process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 95, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-mentioned special figure game process and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the general diagram game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols) and setting display data of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (step A2101). .. In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( The address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

When the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the fluctuation symbol number of the controlled object is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the controlled object is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) is defined. The value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of), and the value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the normal figure (normal figure fluctuation display game). Has been done. The initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval for updating the lighting pattern during the fluctuation time in the batch display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 to (variable symbol number upper limit determination value -1). ) Will be updated sequentially. In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, the display that goes around is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the upper limit determination value of the variable symbol number in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 7. Therefore, the special figure 1 changing display, which is repeatedly displayed during the changing display of the first special figure changing display game, goes through eight times of updating the lighting pattern. Further, 2 is defined as the upper limit determination value of the variable symbol number in the variation control table of the second special figure (second special figure variation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 changing display that is repeatedly displayed during the changing display of the second special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the normal map (normal map fluctuation display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game processing (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the normal map fluctuation are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric power remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). ) To end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during a special time reduction (during normal power support)). (Step B102).
In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step B105). If the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the number of reserved figures is acquired. It is determined whether the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted, saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, and the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the updated normal electric counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, it hits the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure, saves the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") (step B205), clears the normal figure game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and performs the normal power winning switch monitoring process. finish. That is, if there is a prize for a regular train that exceeds the upper limit value during the hit state of the regular map, the hit state of the regular map ends in the middle at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the number of normal power counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B201; Y). ) Performs the normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321) of the normal figure, and ends the normal process of the normal figure. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) of RWM (step B301; Step B302), the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the user is in the high probability of the normal figure, that is, in the time saving state, which is higher than the probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) (step B304).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (Step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B309), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B310), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B311), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1".
Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250".
In addition, at the time of high probability of normal drawing, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.
Then, the process transition setting process (step B320) during the fluctuation of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 101 shows the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321) in the above-mentioned normal figure normal process, and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) in the normal figure display process described later. .. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 102 shows the process transition setting process (step B320) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal map. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
After that, the normal map fluctuation time (for example, 500 msec. In the case of this embodiment, the normal map fluctuation time is common between the normal map low probability state and the normal map high probability state) is set in the normal map game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, turn on the signal during normal symbol 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal figure fluctuation display game changes. The changing flag indicating that the game is inside is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the normal diagram (step B345).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (52 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B346), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. To finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B401) during the process during display of the map in the above-mentioned process during the change of the map will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map (step B411), and the process is performed. The number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B412). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B413), and a signal regarding the end of the normal map fluctuation display is saved. (For example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Then (step B415), the process transition setting process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). , "2", or "4") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B506). After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process for displaying the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
FIG. 105 shows the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B507) in the above-mentioned normal map display process. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, the signal related to the normal symbol 1 hitting is turned ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the signal related to the normal electric accessory 1 operating is turned ON) are output as test signal output data. In order to save in the area (step B513) and output the signal for driving (on) the normal electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B514).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B516). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process transition setting process per normal figure is completed. To do.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during normal drawing.
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the normal operation shifts without performing the process of updating the normal processing control pointer area per normal figure by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed to end the process during normal drawing.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 107 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am trying to do it. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that after the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. The wait time of is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B612), and in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B613), and the normal power operation transition setting is made. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B614), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B615). Ends the solenoid operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Therefore, the processing number is "4". Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B619), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B612, 200 msec is saved as the wait time, in step B614, 1700 msec is saved as the normal electric opening time, and in step B618, 600 msec is saved as the normal electric remaining ball processing time. ..
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 104, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the normal power opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, since the normal power release time is "500 msec", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 500 msec, and then the control pointer is set to "4". Therefore, a normal electric remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 104, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the open time of the normal electric power. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 200 msec is 200 msec because the control pointer is "2". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set.
When the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 3", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 104, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the open time of the normal electric power. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 200 msec is 200 msec because the control pointer is "0". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "2", so it is 200 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set.

[Treatment of residual spheres]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the normal electric remaining ball processing, the normal figure per end processing transition setting process (step B701) is performed.

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B701) per normal figure in the above-mentioned ordinary electric remaining ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the normal figure hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the normal figure hit end process is set (step B711), and the process number is set to the normal figure game. Save in the process number area (step B712).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B716), and the end process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned futur-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the normal figure per end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save to the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation display game (for example, turning off the middle signal per normal symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display, the normal figure hold display, the first game state display unit, the second game state display unit, and the round display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Make settings related to driving the segment LEDs that make up the unit.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output is on timing depending on whether or not the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, so that a blinking cycle of 128 ms is created.
When the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 of the normal figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the normal figure hold indicator is defined is set. (Step S503), if the output is not on-timing (step S502; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table, and the data is saved in the segment area of the reserved number of normal figures display (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved figures is any one of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which of the reserved numbers of ordinary figures display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S506), and when the output is on-timing (step S506; Y), the number of special figure 1 holdes in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step S507). Step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether the output is on-timing (step S510), and if the output is on-timing (step S510; Y), the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when the output is not on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step). S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state is set (step S516) is set (step S516), and the game state display number is set. The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game status display unit composed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and turned on during special drawing time reduction (during normal power support).
After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is set (step S518) is set (step S518), and the game is played. The display data corresponding to the status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game status display unit (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is completed. In the present embodiment, the second game status display unit composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hit, during small hit, during normal electric support). ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is concerned. Determines if the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or longer.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step S604). For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the notification time of the magnet fraud is specified. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, and the fraud notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the magnet illegal notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet invalid flag does not match the value in the magnet invalid flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed.
Here, "step S601; N"->"stepS608"->"stepS609"->"stepS610;Y"->"stepS611"->"stepS612"->"stepS613;Y" is the normal route.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is detected a predetermined number of times, while in the case of panel radio wave fraud, the panel radio wave sensor 62 is detected once. At that point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" or -1. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period ends or is fraudulent from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command to end the illegal radio wave notification is prepared (step S707), a radio wave illegal cancellation flag is prepared as a radio wave illegal flag (step S708), and the prepared radio wave illegal flag is set. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the board radio wave invalid flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the effect command is given. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, "step S701; N"->"stepS705"->"stepS706;Y"->"stepS707"->"stepS708"->"stepS709;Y" is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move to the processing of. Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process of step S810 is performed without the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), it is common. When an electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or a big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). Step S816), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N), and general electric wave fraud has not occurred. (Step S813; N), when the large winning opening fraud has not occurred (step S814; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S815), and step S818 is performed. Move to processing.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S819) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S820). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S822), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”, -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is filled with the main prize ball. The initial value of the signal output control timer is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is out of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the main prize ball signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the payout control device 200 transmits a prize ball signal every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is one of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. The on-state time (for example, 128 ms) is set. After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is completed.
When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0". When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S846; N). Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the effect in the game and the control by the effect control device 300 that controls this effect will be described. FIGS. 117 and 118 show an example of the effect in the special gaming state. Here, the case where the 16R probability variation B jackpot including the short opening occurs is shown.

After the result mode of the jackpot is derived in the special figure variation display game, the fanfare effect according to the jackpot type is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (a), and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the display device 41, the number of rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the symbol display 41b displaying the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, and the right-handed instruction to instruct right-handed hitting Display 41c, display 41d of the number of acquired game balls indicating the number of prize balls acquired by long opening is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), when a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning device 38 in a round that is open for a long time and a prize ball is obtained, the number of the prize balls is displayed as a prize ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and the interval is reached, the interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 117 (d). Here, the next round will also be open for a long time, so an interval effect for long open will be performed.

Further, when the round game progresses to a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode shift becomes as shown in FIG. 117 (e). The selection screen 41f is displayed. On the mode transition selection screen 41f, the normal mode that forms the first mode and the dere mode that forms the second mode can be selected, and the player operates the effect button effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to move the cursor imitating a finger. Make a selection by moving it.

In addition, in the interval production of the round that may be short-open from the next time, that is, in the interval production after the end of 4R, 41 g of the round continuation production that notifies whether or not the long opening will continue after the next time is performed. .. In this round continuous effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the letters "short" and "long" blink alternately, and the final lit letter indicates the result. Here, the jackpot type is Since it is 16R probability change B, it is notified that it will be a short opening. Further, when it is notified that the short opening will be performed, a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at is performed as an interval effect as shown in FIG. 118 (b). For example, when the jackpot type is 16R probability variation A (all open long), it is notified that the character "long" is lit in the round continuous effect 41 g and the open is long.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in a round with a short opening. Further, an emphasis effect 41i is performed to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open. The emphasis effect 41i is displayed as if light is being emitted from the special variable winning device 38. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a decorative means for decorating by light emission, and the light emitting mode by the decorative means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i are associated with the light emitting timing, the light emitting intensity, the light emitting color, and the like. It may or may not be synchronized with.

In addition, when the round with the short opening is started, the number of winning game balls displayed with the short opening is displayed 41j, which indicates the number of prize balls acquired with the short opening, in addition to the number of winning game balls displayed with the long opening 41d. Is displayed. Further, in the round number display 41a, the remaining number of open times is displayed. Here, there are 12 remaining rounds including the running round, and each round is opened once, so it is displayed as 12 more rounds. After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), when the round with the short opening is completed and the interval time is reached, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the emphasis effect 41i emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open is Once the process is completed and the next round is started as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the emphasis effect 41i is restarted.

Then, when the final round is completed, the ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 (f) and 118 (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (f), the number of acquired game balls displayed 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the long opening and the number of short opening acquired game balls displayed 41j indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the short opening. The effect of adding the values in the above is performed, and as shown in FIG. 118 (g), the total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed.

Further, in the ending effect, the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The content of this state suggestion display differs depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 119, depending on the probability state after the end of the special game state (1) to The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), when the normal mode that forms the first mode is selected, only the character of (1) is selected in the high probability state, and (2) in the low probability state. ) Characters are selected. Further, when the dere mode forming the second mode is selected as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. It has become. It should be noted that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as dialogue.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the above-mentioned effect, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 120 and the timer interrupt process (not shown). As shown in FIG. 120, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 121 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of command receptions is completed is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 122 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 is produced. It is a production such as displaying. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of winning a start. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 123 shows a one-shot command process in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step C261 that the MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determine (step C263). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, the scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is on hold in FIG. 1 (step C269). Then, when the MODE is in the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), the MODE determines whether the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in Special Figure 2 (step C271; Y), the MODE is subjected to the special figure 2 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the held hold on the display device 41. (Step C272), the one-shot command processing is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not on hold in FIG. 2 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). Then, when the MODE is error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Further, in step C275, if the MODE is not an error / invalidity (step C275; N), the MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). Then, when MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether or not the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the decorative special figure stop command is the target of the currently changing special figure.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 124 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C302), sets the look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C303), sets the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing. The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 125 shows the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. If the read-ahead variation command is not waiting to be received (step C311; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing in the effect control device 300. First, the process of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of held numbers of the symbols of the latest hold information (step C313) is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-internal look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of judgment, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that have a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation. It is converted into a MODE classified according to the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, there are various modes even in the same type of reach, as the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N), the command value is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when both the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and the MODE is saved. A look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) (step C320; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C321) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the pre-reading notice effect (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading advance notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and is an effect or variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. There is an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading notice effect is set (step C324), and the pre-reading variable command processing is ended.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 126 shows a symbol-based command process (step C240) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this symbol-based command processing, first, the special symbol type (either special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352) and end the symbol command processing.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, a 16R normal A jackpot symbol, a 16R normal B jackpot symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. It is associated with the data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from multiple symbol type setting tables. Is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 127 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, a 16R normal A jackpot symbol, a 16R normal B jackpot symbol, and a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol. There is a winning pattern. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is as if the deviation command (variation pattern command) was received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol was received. It means that the combination is inconsistent with the above (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or not during fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 128 shows a variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the production mode at that time is set (step C382). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always a missed symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for notices appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the notice production of the latter half fluctuation. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the advance notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, the sound number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of the identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is set. (Step C398), and the variation effect setting process is completed.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 129 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, when the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during the fanfare. The setting (step C403) is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), the MODE determines if it is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. Then, when the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminate system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is the ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state, screen information for notifying that the high probability state is reached is set, and the big hit ends. The ending effect setting process for setting the screen information corresponding to the later game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command process is completed. If the MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning the special variable winning device 38.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command process ends. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is completed.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening round is a short opening round in which the opening time is a predetermined time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time is 0.2 seconds in the short open round, and the openable time is 29 seconds in the long open round.

Then, if it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball number counter is set. The display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on this is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is completed. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. , The updated value is displayed in step C423.

Further, in the case of the short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the short opening pattern counter is updated. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process is completed. The counter for the short opening pattern counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening round, and in step C424, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. , The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are counted and displayed separately. That is, the effect control device 300 provides a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is a winning in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant. Further, the effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means. It serves as a counting means for separately counting the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the above.

[Fanfare production setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, the ACT determines whether the fanfare is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, and 16R normal B.

When the ACT is a jackpot fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of jackpots is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display content of the jackpot fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of jackpots (step C433). The number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on the normal game state, which is not a high probability state or a time saving state. That is, it counts the so-called number of consecutive chans. After that, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is set (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes a short opening (step C435). When the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all the rounds are long opening, the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. When the short opening is included (step C434; Y), the short opening big hit information is set (step C436), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. ..

If the ACT is not a jackpot fanfare (step C431; N), the ACT determines whether it is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the 4R probability change (sudden probability). When the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether the ACT is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the suddenly dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C439), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is performed. End the setting process. In the sudden probability-only effect corresponding to the probability state, when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, the probability state becomes high after the special game state, so an effect for notifying or suggesting to that effect is performed. Further, when the 4R probability change occurs in the high probability state, the high probability state continues even after the special game state, so an effect of notifying or suggesting to that effect is performed.

Further, in the case of a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; Y), the sudden effect to be executed is drawn from the sudden effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the sudden effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. That is, in the case of the 4R probability change from the continuous production, the production related to the continuous production is performed even in the special game state. In the case of 4R probability change, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), the ACT determines whether it is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. Further, when the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the ACT is a hit from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C443). ).

If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare is performed. The effect setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, the probability state does not change before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state, an effect of notifying or suggesting that the probability state at the time of the small hit is maintained is performed.

Further, in the case of a hit from the continuous effect (step C442; Y), the small hit effect to be executed is drawn from the small hit effect patterns related to the current variable effect (continuous effect) (step C445). The determined display setting of the small hit effect is performed (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is completed. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous production, the production related to the continuous production is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability variation or small hit from continuous production, when 4R probability variation or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure variation display game that becomes sudden probability or small hit), the result mode is not clearly shown, and 4R An effect is performed to indicate which one is in the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit. For example, the production in which the enemy character and the ally character fight is performed as a continuous production, and the battle is not yet settled at the time of deriving the result mode. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability change, the effect that the ally character wins (sudden probability effect) is performed, and in the case of the small hit, the effect that the enemy character wins (small hit effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, the display setting of the right-handed instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether the game is in a special gaming state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability change) (step C462).

In the case of a special gaming state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (step C462; Y), the display setting of the small hit / sudden round effect is set (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. Further, when the game is not in a special gaming state based on a small hit or abruptness (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of a big hit including a short open round is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step C464).

When there is no short-open jackpot information (step C464; N), that is, in a special gaming state of only long-open rounds, the number of rounds is displayed (step C465), and the display setting of the round effect of the long-open pattern is set. (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long opening pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether or not the mode transition selection round is such that the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected (step C468). If it is not a mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends. Further, in the case of the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), the display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when there is short-open jackpot information (step C464; Y), that is, in a special gaming state including a short-open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value for the short-open round (step C470). ). Then, if the number of rounds is not a predetermined value for a short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is a long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

Further, when the number of rounds is a predetermined value for short opening rounds (step C470; Y), that is, when the number of rounds is short opening, the display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is set (step C471), and the rounds are performed. The remaining number of open times is calculated from the number upper limit value information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening, which is the number of times of opening in the short opening, is set (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect for encouraging the aim of winning the special variable winning device 38 is set (step C475). After that, the sound number which is the BGM number based on the emphasis effect, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decorative lamp, etc. are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process is completed.

That is, in the round with a short opening, the small hit with a short opening, and the round with a 4R probability variation, an effect different from the round with a long opening is performed. As described above, the special variable winning device 38 makes it easy for the game ball to stay in the opening / closing member 990, and it is possible to aim for a winning even with a short opening, so emphasis is placed on encouraging the player to aim for a winning. Perform the production 41i.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number which is a BGM number of a long opening interval, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decorative lamp, etc. are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round is set. It is determined whether or not there is short-open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

When there is no short-open jackpot information (step C482; N), that is, when there is a special gaming state only for the long-open round, the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the long opening interval as shown in FIG. 117 (d) is set. Further, when there is short-open jackpot information (step C482; Y), that is, when there is a special gaming state including short-open rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of final rounds that will be open for a long time, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

When the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, when the round is a short opening from the next time, the display setting of the round continuous notification effect is set (step C484), and the BGM based on the round continuous notification effect is set. The sound number, which is the number of the above, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc., is set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is completed. As a result, the round continuous notification effect as shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b) is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not a predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). When the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the next round will be a long opening, and the long opening interval will remain set.

If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is set (step C487), and the sound number, the decorative lamp, etc., which are the BGM numbers of the short opening interval, are used. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process is completed. In this case, the short opening interval as shown in FIG. 118 (d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasis effect 41i may be performed as in the round, or the interval-only emphasis effect may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 134 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information, which is the jackpot type information that triggered the occurrence of this special game state, is loaded (step C491), and the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (step C491) are loaded. (See FIG. 119 (a)), the state suggestion display is set (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode as the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the player can select the mode. The first mode and the second mode are different production modes such as the content of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state, and the production of the special figure variation display game. The effect mode can be selected on the mode transition selection screen 41f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player selects the effect mode by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. When the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. Further, when there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, when the second mode is set, the state suggestion display based on the selectivity in the second mode (see FIG. 119 (b)) is set (see FIG. 119 (b)). Step C494) and step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter (step C495), and the display setting of the addition effect based on the total acquired game ball number is set (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is completed. By the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. ..

FIG. 135 shows a modified example of the effect in the special gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c), the right-handed instruction display 41c for instructing right-handed may be displayed so as to flow from the left to the right of the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game. Further, the right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b, but the back side of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right-handed instruction display 41c flows, and the symbol display 41b is always visible. State. The round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, and the like, which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may or may not be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to 135 (f), the promotion effect 41h urging the special variable winning device 38 to be aimed may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variable winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game, the promotion effect 41h is displayed on the back side of the symbol display 41b as shown in FIG. 135 (d). However, the symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasis effect 41i, the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or should not be hidden. Is also good. Further, the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) to (f) are simultaneously performed. You may.

FIG. 136 also shows a modified example of the effect in the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 136A, the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 24 and the special variation winning device 38 are used as a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variation winning device 38 to aim and an emphasis effect 41i for emphasizing that the special variation winning device 38 is open. Using the image of the device 38, the operation unit 24 may be instructed to turn greatly to the right, or the special variable winning device 38 may be instructed to aim. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be aimed at. Further, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located at the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized, and at first glance. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at can be known. Of course, the light emitting mode of the operation unit 24 may be synchronized in the same manner.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special variable winning device 38. Further, in the image of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, it is not necessary to display in synchronization with the light emission effect of the actual operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38. good. Further, the image of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be a still image.

Further, the character information and the image of the arrow included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the batch display device 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be synchronized with the actual display mode of the batch display device 50, or the display may not be synchronized. Is also good. Any display mode may be used when the display mode is not synchronized, but for example, it is associated with a state in which all lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7-segment display, "7" or the like). A specific number is lit. In the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a jackpot is associated as a unique lighting mode when a jackpot occurs).

Further, when the right-handed gaming state is started, an image may be displayed in which the operation unit 24 is instructed to be largely turned to the right or the normal variable winning device 37 is instructed to aim. .. Further, when the left-handed gaming state is started, an image may be displayed in which the operation unit 24 is instructed to turn slightly to the right or the winning device 90 is instructed to aim.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the remaining time display 41n that displays the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. In most cases, the end condition of the round that is established in the case of short opening is that the openable time elapses rather than the predetermined number of game balls being awarded to the special variable winning device 38, and the round ends in a certain time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are short-opened, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the round time until the end of the final round and the interval time. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from the case of notifying by the number of remaining rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. That is, the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state is provided, and the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means can be notified. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or more, and the second opening mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or less. Although it has been described as a short opening, the present invention is not limited to this, and any opening mode may be used as long as the first opening mode and the second opening mode are different. Further, as the gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on a prize in the starting area is mentioned, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in an auxiliary gaming device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called blade that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the inflow of the game ball winning in the auxiliary gaming device into a specific area. (Old 2 types) game machines may be used.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). 97) A game in which a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine 10 controls a special variable winning device 38 that can convert a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state, and an effect related to the game. An effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special game state includes a first open mode (long open) and a second open mode different from the first open mode. There is a mode (short opening), and when the second opening mode is executed, the effect control means can execute the promotion effect 41h for prompting the launch of the game ball toward the special variable winning device 38. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a launch operation unit (operation unit 24) for the player to operate to adjust the launch force of the game ball, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated by light emission. The effect control means is provided with a decorative means, and the effect control means displays the operation method of the launch operation unit necessary for launching the game ball toward the special variable winning device 38 as the promotion effect 41h. The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variation winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the content of the promotion effect 41h.

Further, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In the gaming machine 10 that executes a variable display game that fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. , A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. The operation mode of the 38 includes a first open mode (long open mode) and a second open mode (short open mode) different from the first open mode. It is provided with a winning determination means (effect control device 300) for determining which of the opening mode and the second opening mode the winning is. Therefore, it is possible to control the production and progress of the game based on the information obtained by the winning determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the prize in the special variable prize device 38, and based on the prize determination by the prize determination means, based on the prize in the special variable prize device 38 in the first opening mode. A counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the second open mode is provided. Therefore, it is possible to control the production and progress of the game based on the information obtained by the counting means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means is a prize ball based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode based on the counting result by the counting means. The number and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the second open mode can be notified separately. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the counting result which has not been notified yet at a predetermined timing after notifying only a part of the counting result by the counting means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machines of this modified example differ in the execution mode of the addition effect.

As shown in FIG. 137, in this modified example, it is possible to not immediately display the number of prize balls acquired in the short opening on the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j. In the example shown in FIG. 137, a round with a short opening is performed as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) and 137 (b), and as shown in FIG. A value equal to the number is displayed on the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j. After that, 15 prize balls newly acquired in the short opening were generated, but as shown in FIG. 136 (c), these 15 balls were not added to the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j.

Then, in the ending effect after the final round is completed, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the number of prize balls acquired in the short opening is shown on the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of prize balls acquired in the long opening. The effect of adding the value in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j is performed, and the total number display 41k displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed as shown in FIG. 137 (e). At this point, the total number display 41k does not include the number of 15 prize balls that were not added in FIG. 137 (c). After that, in the latter half of the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and 137 (g), 15 prize balls that have not been added are added to the total number display 41k to perform an additional effect.

Regarding the short opening round, the player is interested in how much the game value (prize ball) can be acquired, and in addition to the value displayed in the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j, further By performing an additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain and enhance the interest of the game.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 138 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 130. In this count effect setting process, in the case of a short opening round (step C421), a count display lottery is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the number of acquired prize balls is immediately displayed on the short opening acquisition game ball number display 41j (step C601). ).

If it is determined to be displayed as a result of the count display lottery (step C602; Y), the processes of steps C424 and C425 are performed, and the number of acquired prize balls is immediately displayed on the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j. If, as a result of the count display lottery, the counter is not displayed (step C602; N), the non-display counter is updated based on the large winning opening count command (step C603), and the count effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the number of prize balls won is counted by the hidden counter, but it is not displayed at this point.

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 139 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, the retotal number is calculated from the total number of acquired game balls and the non-display counter (step C611), and the additional effect based on the retotal number is set (step C612). Then, the hidden counter is reset (step C612). By this process, after the addition effect shown in FIGS. 137 (d) and 137 (e), the addition effect shown in FIGS. 137 (f) and 137 (g) is performed.

It should be noted that an additional effect of notifying the number of prize balls that has not yet been notified may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state. For example, in a round that is open for a long time, an additional effect may be performed only when a specified number of prizes (for example, 9) or more that can be won in one round or more are generated.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the processing related to the display of the state suggestion display 41m.

FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect in the special gaming state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when a predetermined round is reached in the round with a short opening, the effect button operation effect in which the player operates the effect button 25 is started. In this effect button operation effect, the display mode of the state suggestion display 41 m is changed according to the operation result of the effect button 25.

In this effect button operation effect, a meter display 41p that prompts the operation of the effect button 25 and displays the operation status is displayed. The meter display 41p is a display in which a plurality of areas are vertically overlapped, and the display color is sequentially changed from the lower area according to the time when the player presses and holds the effect button 25 and the number of times the effect button 25 is pressed. By doing so, the operation status is notified.

When the player presses and holds the effect button 25 for a predetermined time or longer or presses the effect button 25 for a predetermined number of times or more within the valid period to achieve the final condition, all of the meter display 41p as shown in FIG. 140 (b). The display color of the area changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the ending effect, the state suggestion display 41 m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round is displayed.

If the player presses and holds the effect button 25 or presses the effect button 25 within the valid period but does not achieve the final condition, a part of the meter display 41p is shown as shown in FIG. 140 (d). The display color of the area changes. Here, the final condition is not achieved, but the predetermined intermediate condition is achieved. As shown in FIG. 140 (e), in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41 m in which a part is hidden is displayed. To.

Further, if the player does not operate the effect button 25 within the valid period, the display color of the entire area of the meter display 41p does not change as shown in FIG. 140 (f). Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed in the ending effect. Similarly, when the player presses and holds the effect button 25 or presses the effect button 25 within the valid period, but the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state suggestion display 41 m is not displayed.

The state suggestion display 41m in which a part shown in FIG. 140 (e) is concealed is selected by the selectivity shown in FIG. 141 according to the probability state after the end of the special gaming state. Although a part of these state suggestion displays 41m is concealed, since the display modes are different from each other, it is possible for a player who is accustomed to discriminate. However, since each state suggestion display 41m can be selected from either a high probability state or a low probability state, it is difficult to clearly grasp the probability state after the end of the special game state.

[Direction button operation effect processing]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the effect button operation effect process shown in FIG. 142 in the effect button input process in the main process shown in FIG. 120. In this effect button operation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621), and if the effect button operation effect is not being executed (step C621; N), the effect button operation effect process is performed. To finish. Further, when the effect button operation effect is being executed (step C621; Y), it is determined whether or not the effect button is operated (step C622), and when there is no operation (step C622; N), the effect button operation is performed. End the production process.

When there is an operation of the effect button (step C622; Y), the operation input counter is updated according to the operation mode of the effect button (step C623), and the meter display is set based on the operation input counter (step C624). ), Effect button operation Ends the effect process. That is, the value of the operation input counter is updated every time the effect button 25 is pressed for a certain period of time or the effect button 25 is pressed for a short time, and the meter display is displayed according to this value. Will be done.

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether the operation input counter is the upper limit value (step C631), and if it is the upper limit value (step C631; Y), that is, when the final condition is achieved, the operation input counter is reset. Then (step C635), the ending effect setting process is completed. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m set in steps C491 to C494 is displayed.

When the operation input counter is not the upper limit value (step C631; N), it is determined whether the operation input counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (step C632). When the operation input counter is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (step C632; Y), that is, when the intermediate condition is achieved, the state suggestion display 41 m based on the selectivity of the reset table (see FIG. 141) is set (step C633). , The operation input counter is reset (step C635), and the ending effect setting process is completed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state suggestion display 41 m in which a part is concealed is displayed.

If the operation input counter does not exceed a predetermined value (step C632; N), that is, if the intermediate condition is not achieved, the state suggestion display is set to non-display (step C634), and the operation input counter is reset. (Step C635), the ending effect setting process is completed. In this case, the state suggestion display 41m is not displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (g). That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies information about the game after the end of the special game state based on the operation mode of the operation unit (effect button 25, touch panel 29) by the player during the special game state. It means that the mode is different.

Depending on the operation of the effect button 25 (depending on the value of the operation input counter), the state suggestion display 41m may be gradually changed from a completely hidden state to a completely visible state.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example is designed to give points according to the gaming result in the special gaming state.

FIG. 144 shows an example of the effect in the special gaming state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), a round with a short opening is performed, and as shown in FIG. 144 (b) based on the fact that one game ball wins the special variable winning device 38 in this short opening round. You can get one character in. When a character is acquired, the acquisition display 41q for notifying the type of the acquired character is performed, and the acquired character is displayed on the total acquisition display 41r displayed by the character acquired in the special gaming state. In FIG. 144 (b), it is notified that the star character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character has been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when one game ball wins the special variable winning device 38 again, one character is acquired. Here, it is notified that the peach character has been acquired in the acquisition display 41q, and it is shown that one star character and one peach character have been acquired in the total acquisition display 41r. The character to be acquired is selected for each prize according to the selection rate as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

As shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the ending effect, the type of the acquired character is displayed in the total acquisition display 41r. Here, it is shown that seven star characters, one peach character, one musical note character, and one treasure chest character have been acquired. Since one character corresponds to one prize in the special variable winning device 38, the short-open acquisition game ball number display 41j is displayed corresponding to the total acquisition display 41r, and is added to the acquisition game ball number display 41d. Addition production is performed.

Further, a privilege corresponding to the acquired character is given, and the grant notification display 41s for notifying the grant of the privilege is performed accordingly. As shown in FIG. 144 (e), points are awarded when a peach character is acquired. This point can be used by the player to customize the production of the game. Further, when the musical note character is acquired as shown in FIG. 144 (f), a special BGM is set as the BGM after the end of the special game state. Further, when the character of the treasure box is acquired as shown in FIG. 144 (g), a special background is set as the background after the end of the special game state.

By giving the privilege in this way, it is possible to aim for a prize in the special variable winning device 38 even if the opening is short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, by giving a game value different from that of the prize ball, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can give a game value different from that of the prize ball based on the winning of the special variable prize device 38.

[Count effect setting process]
In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 performs the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 145 instead of the count effect setting process shown in FIG. 130. In this count effect setting process, in the case of a short open round (step C421), a character is selected based on the selection rate of the display icon table (see FIG. 144 (h)) (step C651), and the character display setting is set. (Step C652). As a result, the acquisition display 41q and the total acquisition display 41r are performed as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and 144 (c).

[Ending effect setting process]
Further, instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 134, the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 146 is performed. In this ending effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the point-giving character (here, the peach character) has been acquired (step C661). If the point-giving character has not been acquired (step C661; N), the process proceeds to step C663. If the point-giving character has been acquired (step C661; Y), points are awarded based on the number of points acquired (step C662), and the process proceeds to step C663.

Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM character (here, the character of the musical note) has been acquired (step C663). If the BGM character has not been acquired (step C663; N), the process proceeds to step C665. If the BGM character has been acquired (step C663; Y), the privilege BGM is set (step C664), and the process proceeds to step C665.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background character (here, the treasure chest character) has been acquired (step C665). If the background character has not been acquired (step C665; N), the ending effect setting process ends. If the background character has been acquired (step C665; Y), the privilege background is set (step C666), and the ending effect setting process ends.

[Main processing]
Further, instead of the main process shown in FIG. 120, the main process shown in FIG. 147 is performed. In this main process, an effect point control process (step C671) for performing a process related to the effect point is performed.

[Production point control process]
FIG. 148 shows the effect point control process (step C671) in the above-mentioned main process. In this effect point setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a grant privilege selection operation flag set in a state where the player has selected the grant privilege based on the points (step C691). As the grant benefits that can be selected here, in addition to the bonus BGM and bonus background, it is possible to generate effects that cannot normally be seen, such as making a special character appear and making it possible to generate a special reach. Things can be mentioned.

If there is a flag during the grant privilege selection operation (step C691; Y), the process proceeds to step C702. Further, when there is no flag during the grant privilege selection operation (step C691; N), the state information is acquired (step C692). The state information is information indicating the state of the gaming machine, such as during the execution of the special figure variation display game, during the special gaming state, and during the waiting state for customers.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether or not the state is a state that triggers the reset of the accumulated point value (step C693). Here, the reset is triggered when the customer is waiting. If it is not in a state that triggers a reset of the accumulated points (step C693; N), the process proceeds to step C694. Further, in the case of a state that triggers the reset of the accumulated points (step C693; Y), the accumulated points are reset (step C694), and the process proceeds to step C695.

Next, based on the acquired state information, it is determined whether or not the state is a state that triggers the reset of the granted privilege (step C695). The grant privilege is a privilege BGM and a privilege background. Further, here, the reset is triggered when the customer is waiting. If it is not in a state that triggers the reset of the granted privilege (step C695; N), the process proceeds to step C697. Further, in the case of a state that triggers the reset of the granted privilege (step C695; Y), the granted privilege is reset (step C696), and the process proceeds to step C697.

Next, it is determined whether or not the points can be exchanged based on the acquired state information (step C697). Here, points can be exchanged when the customer is not in the waiting state. If the points cannot be exchanged (step C697; N), the effect point control process ends. When the points can be exchanged (step C697; Y), it is determined whether the point exchange conditions are satisfied (step C699). The point exchange condition is that the accumulated point value is equal to or greater than the minimum number of points required for exchange set for each grant privilege. If this point exchange condition is not satisfied (step C699; N), the effect point control process ends. Further, when the point exchange condition is satisfied (step C699; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a point exchange start operation (step C700).

The point exchange start operation is an operation in which a predetermined operation is performed on the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to start the exchange of points for the granted privilege. If there is no point exchange start operation (step C700; N), the effect point control process ends. If there is a point exchange start operation (step C700; Y), the grant privilege selection operation flag is set (step C701), and the effect point control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is a flag during the grant privilege selection operation (step C691; Y), it is determined whether or not the grant privilege has been determined (step C702). If there is no operation for determining the grant privilege (step C702; N), the effect point control process ends. Further, when there is an operation for determining the grant privilege (step C702; Y), the selected grant privilege is set (step C703), the grant privilege selection operation flag is reset (step C704), and the effect point control process is performed. To exit.

In addition, although it is assumed that the point-giving character is acquired as an opportunity to acquire points, points may be acquired in other cases. For example, when executing the look-ahead effect, points may be acquired according to the pre-reading effect to be executed. In addition, points may be earned when the game is continued for a predetermined time, when a specific effect occurs, or when a prize is won in the winning opening.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example is designed to reduce the flow speed of the gaming ball up to the opening / closing member 990.

As shown in FIG. 149, the upper surface 617 of the guide portion 616 is formed with a protrusion 481 and a recess 482 similar to the protrusion 992 and the recess 993 provided in the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening / closing member 990. Due to such protrusions 481 and recesses 482, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 617 of the guide portion 616 flows down to the left while meandering back and forth, and flows down more than when these protrusions 481 and recesses 482 are not present. It slows down. As a result, the flow speed can be sufficiently reduced to reach the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be lengthened.

In the configuration of FIG. 149 (a), since the game ball approaches a position closer to the player than the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), it is easy to see the flow mode of the game ball toward the special variable winning device 38, and the game You can improve your interest. Further, in the configuration of FIG. 149 (b), since the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the back surface of the cover glass of the glass frame 15, the cover glass can be protected and the noise generated by colliding with the cover glass can be protected. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 150, a protruding portion 481 for meandering the flowing game ball may be provided in a portion of the flow path 38f on the upstream side of the opening / closing member 990. In this way, the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990 can be reduced, and the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 can be lengthened. Further, as shown in FIG. 151, a protrusion 481 and a recess 482 that meander the flowing game ball may be provided in a portion of the flow path 38f on the upstream side of the opening / closing member 990. This also makes it possible to reduce the speed of the game ball flowing into the opening / closing member 990, and further prolong the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990.

Vibration is generated by the meandering of the game ball, and a detection sensor for detecting this vibration may be provided. Alternatively, a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball may be provided at a portion where the game ball meanders. Then, the effect control device 300 makes an effect such as causing the LED to emit light based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. By doing so, it is possible to attract attention to the game ball that meanders and stays, and it is possible to show that the game ball can flow into the special variable winning device 38 at a short opening.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modified example has a different configuration of the special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the special variation winning device 38 of this modified example, the induction flow path 955 composed of the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 extends downward with the V flow path 955a and the right side. It branches into a discharge ball flow path 955b extending in the direction. A V door 501 that can slide in the front-rear direction is provided at a position that serves as an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a. The V door 520 can be converted into a blocking state in which the V door 520 protrudes forward to prevent the inflow into the V flow path 955a and a permissible state in which the V door 520 retracts backward to allow the inflow into the V flow path 955a.

The game ball that won the grand prize opening 38d and flowed into the guide flow path 955 was guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, and was formed in the main body portion 970. It is guided to the right by the rib 973 and reaches the branch portion of the V flow path 955a and the discharge ball flow path 955b. When the V door 520 is retracted rearward, it can flow into the lower V flow path 955a, and the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a is a probabilistic operation area switch that detects the game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a. After being detected by the 460, it is guided backward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970, and discharges the gaming ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It is designed to flow into the flow path. As will be described later, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the gaming ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special gaming state and the probability variation operation region. It is set to a high probability state based on the detection by the switch 460.

On the other hand, in the state where the V door 520 protrudes forward, the game ball reaching the branch portion is guided to the right through the upper surface of the V door 520 and flows into the discharge ball flow path 955b. The game ball that has flowed into the discharge ball flow path 955b is guided to the right, reaches the back surface side of the main body 970 through the through holes 462 formed in the main body 970 and penetrates the front and back, and is further guided downward to be discharged. After being detected by the residual ball discharge switch 461 that detects the game ball flowing down the ball flow path 955b, the ball flows into the discharge flow path that discharges the game ball to the outside of the game machine. A rib 463 for guiding the game ball flowing down the discharge ball flow path 955b to the rear through port 462 is formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and at a position facing the through port 462.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, a V-door unit 500 for operating the V-door is provided on the back surface side of the main body 970. The V-door unit 500 is provided with a V-door 520, a lever solenoid 502 for driving the V-door 520, and a link member 510 for operating the V-door 520 in response to the drive of the lever solenoid 502.

The lever solenoid 502 is arranged so that the drive shaft 503 extends downward along the vertical direction. The first link member 511 of the link member 510 is connected to the tip of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 can slide and move along the vertical direction with the operation of the drive shaft 503. The first link member 511 is provided with a bearing portion 512 that receives the connecting shaft 514 provided at one end of the second link member 513 so that the connecting shaft 514 moves up and down with the operation of the drive shaft 503. It has become.

The second link member 513 has a bent shape in a dogleg shape, and a connecting shaft 514 connecting to the first link member 511 is provided at the end of the arm portion 517 extending from the bent portion to one side. There is. Further, a connecting shaft 515 connected to the V door 520 is provided at the end of the arm portion 518 extending from the bent portion to the other side. Further, a rotation shaft 516 is provided at the bent portion. The rotating shaft 516 is perpendicular to the extending direction of the arm portions 517 and 518 extending from the bent portion, and the connecting shafts 514 and 515 extend parallel to the rotating shaft. The rotating shaft 516 is pivotally supported along the left-right direction by a bearing portion 464 formed on the back surface of the main body portion 670, and the second link member 513 is rotatable about the rotating shaft 516.

The V door 520 includes a door portion 521 that can extend into the V flow path 955a. The upper surface of the door portion 521 is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the right discharge ball flow path 955b in a state of extending to the V flow path 955a. ing. Further, the front end portion of the door portion 521 in the extending direction is an inclined surface that is inclined so that the lower end portion is located on the rear side with respect to the upper end portion. By forming the inclined surface in this way, when the door portion 521 is extended forward to the V flow path 955a, the game ball existing in the inflow portion to the V flow path 955a is released upward or downward. be able to.

Further, an insertion portion 522 for inserting the connecting shaft 515 of the second link member 513 is formed at the rear portion of the V door 520. The front-rear width of the insertion portion 522 is slightly wider than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 515, but the vertical width is sufficiently wider than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 515, and the connecting shaft 515 moves in the vertical direction within the insertion portion 522. It is possible.

Further, a slit-shaped guided portion 523 along the front-rear direction is formed on the bottom surface of the V-door 520. As shown in FIG. 154, a penetration portion 467 penetrating the front and rear is formed in a portion of the main body portion 670 where the V door 520 is arranged, and the V of the V door unit 500 provided on the back surface side of the main body portion 670. The door portion 521 of the door 520 extends through the penetrating portion 467 to the inflow portion of the V flow path 955a on the front side of the main body portion. A guide rib 465 extending along the front-rear direction for guiding the movement of the V-door 520 in the front-rear direction is formed in the penetrating portion 467 so as to be slidably fitted with the guided portion of the V-door 520. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 155 (a), 156 (a), and 157 (b), the V-door unit 500 configured as described above is in a state in which the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most extended in the operating range. In the (OFF state), the first link member 510 is located at the lower end of the operating range, and the second link member 513 is rotated most counterclockwise when viewed from the right side of the second link member 513. The connecting shaft 515 is located at the foremost end of the moving range. As a result, the V door 520 is pushed out to the front end of the moving range and extends above the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a.

When the lever solenoid 502 is operated from this state to retract the drive shaft 503 (turned on), the first link member 510 moves upward and the second link member 513 moves clockwise backward when viewed from the right. Rotate. Along with this, the connecting shaft 515 of the second link member 513 moves rearward, and the V door 520 moves rearward. Then, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b), 156 (b), and 157 (c), when the drive shaft 503 of the lever solenoid 502 is most retracted in the operating range, the V door 520 is the rear end of the moving range. The door portion 521 is completely retracted from the V flow path 955a, and the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path 955a is allowed. When the door portion 521 is extended above the V flow path 955a to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path 955a, the operation opposite to the above is performed.

FIG. 158 shows a block diagram of the game control device 100 in the game machine of this modified example. The detection signal of the game ball from the probability change operation area switch 460 and the remaining ball discharge switch 461 provided in the special variation winning device 38 is input to the game control device 100. Further, the lever solenoid is controlled by the game control device 100.

16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A, 16R normal B, and 4R probability variation are set as the jackpot types in the gaming machine of this modified example. The first round of each jackpot type is a probability change determination round. This probability variation determination round is a round for determining whether or not the game ball will be in the high probability state after the end of the special game state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. The probability change in the name of each jackpot type indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the V flow path 955a and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into the game is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in a high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is probabilistic, the V flow path 955a If the game ball does not flow into the V flow path 955a, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a, the high probability state occurs.

FIG. 159 shows the operation of the special variable winning device 38 that can be executed in each round of the special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the V opening opens the special variable winning device 38 with the start of the round (t31). Further, the lever solenoid 502 is turned on (retracted state) with the start of the round, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is enabled. When the lever solenoid 502 is OFF (extended state), the door portion 521 covers the V flow path 955a and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 502 is ON, the door portion 521 is V flow. It is in a state where the game ball can flow in after evacuating from the road 955a. Further, the state in which the probability change operation area switch 460 is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 460 is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operation area switch 460 is invalid is a state in which even if the probability variation operation area switch 460 detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 502 is turned off 64 ms after the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 460 becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game ball immediately after the special variable winning device 38 is opened flows into the V flow path 955a.

The special variable winning device 38 is closed 200 ms after the start of the round (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and when either the condition that the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won is satisfied. The special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t39). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 502 is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability variation operation area switch 460 is also effective (t36). The second opening of the special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 502 remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the V flow path 955a. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 502 can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and the game ball that has flowed into the special variable winning device 38 just before closing. Can also flow into the V flow path 955a. The special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or when a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening. If this is the case, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end of the remaining sphere processing time (t42), the operation is terminated, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is invalidated.

Further, when the special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls won in the special variable winning device 38 are not discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If all of the lever solenoid 502 is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 502 is in the OFF state when the discharge is completed, the operation is terminated, and the probability variation operation area is reached. Switch 460 is disabled.

In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 502 is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 502 is released at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t43). It goes into the OFF state and ends the operation. In this case, the probability variation operation area switch 460 becomes invalid (t44) 100 ms after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 159 (b), in the short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the special variable winning device 38 in the V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the round ends based on the completion of the opening. (T54). Since the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the lever solenoid 502 is also turned on for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the V flow path 955a. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 502 and the activation / invalidation of the probability variation operation area switch 460 are performed in the same manner as in the case of V opening as long as the game ball remains in the special variation winning device 38 (t56 to t63). ). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the special variable winning device 38 even after the large winning opening remaining ball processing time elapses, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. At the same time as the operation is terminated, the probabilistic operating area switch 460 becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 502 is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 502 is in the ON state (t62). After 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 502 is turned off (t62) after the operation is completed in the state, the probability variation operation area switch 460 becomes invalid (t63).

However, in the short opening, the lever solenoid 502 and the probability variation operating area switch 460 are controlled as shown in FIG. 159 (b) only when the short opening is performed in the first round. When the short opening is performed in other rounds, the lever solenoid 502 is not operated and the probability change operation area switch 460 remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the long opening, the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t61) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are released. When either of the conditions for winning is satisfied, the special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t62). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the big winning opening are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In this long opening, the lever solenoid 502 is left in the OFF state, and the probability change operation area switch 460 is also left in the invalid state.

In each of the above-mentioned jackpot types, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, V opening is performed in the first round. Also, in the case of a normal big hit, a short opening is performed in the first round. Then, for the second and subsequent rounds, the 16R probability variation A and the 16R probability variation A are all long open, the 16R probability variation B and the 16R normal B are 2-4R long opening, and the 5-16R short opening. Also, in the 4R probability change, all are short-opened. However, when the short circuit is opened after 2R, the lever solenoid 502 is left in the OFF state, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is also left in the invalid state. Even in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 502 is left in the OFF state, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is also left ineffective.

The first opening period (t31 to t32) of the door portion 521 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door portion 521 in the short opening stay on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. It is a period in which it is difficult for the game ball that has been used to reach the V flow path 955a.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened comes into contact with the protruding portion 992 formed in the opening / closing member 990, whereby FIG. 31 As shown in (b), it bounces and is guided away from the grand prize opening 38d. That is, it is guided in a direction away from the V flow path 955a forming a specific region. Further, the bounced game ball comes into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like so that the time to reach the V flow path 955a becomes longer. It has become. For this reason, it is difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. However, since the protrusions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the game balls that have fallen without contacting the protrusions 992 through these intervals are in the V flow path. There is a slight possibility of inflow to 955a. Of course, the protrusions 992 are arranged at intervals that allow the game balls to pass, or are provided in a continuous rib shape along the front end of the upper surface, so that the game is placed on the opening / closing member 990 when the game is opened. The balls may always come into contact with each other.

Further, the initial opening period (t31 to t34) of the special variable winning device 38 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t54) of the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening are set to the protrusion 992 or the like as described above. Even if the game ball bounces in contact with the ball, it is possible to flow into the large winning opening 38d. As a result, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the large winning opening 38d. The opening period of the door portion 521 and the opening period of the special variable winning device 38 are set to the design value for generating a high probability state set at the design stage of the gaming machine and the design value for the winning rate in the short opening. , The opening / closing member 990 and the like are set according to the structure of the special variable winning device 38.

[Probability change operating area switch monitoring process]
Further, the game control device 100 performs the probability change operation area switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 160. In this probabilistic operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic operation area switch 460 is in effect (step A2401). When the probability variation operation area switch 460 is effective, it means that the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operation area switch 460 is treated as valid. When the probability change operation area switch 460 is not active (step A2401; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the probability change operation area switch 460 is in effect (step A2401; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability change operation area switch 460 has an input (step A2402).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch 460 (step A2402; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends. When the probability variation operation area switch 460 has an input (step A2402; Y), the probability variation operation area passage command is prepared (step A2403), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A2404). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path 955a.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol (step A2405). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, and 4R probability variation. In the case of a big hit with these symbols, the V is opened, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the V flow path 955a. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 16R normal A or 16R normal B, which is not a V easy symbol, the short is opened, so that the game ball rarely flows into the V flow path 955a.

When the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol (step A2405; Y), the probability variation operation area normal passage information is set (step A2406), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation area passage information area (step A2408). ), The probability change operation area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the jackpot symbol is not a V-easy symbol (step A2405; N), the probability variation operation area irregular passage information is set (step A2407), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation area passage information area (step A2408). ), The probability change operation area switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Big hit end processing]
Then, instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG. 84, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 161 is performed. In this jackpot end process, it is determined whether or not there is stochastic operation region passage information (probability variation operation region normal passage information or probability variation operation region irregular passage information) set when the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a (step). A2411). Then, when there is no probability operation area passage information (step A2411; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202). In this case, the high probability state does not occur. If there is information about passing through the stochastic operating region (step A2411; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). In this case, it is a high probability state. That is, when the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a regardless of the jackpot symbol, the probability is high.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Further, the game control device 100 performs a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 502. As shown in FIG. 162, in this lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether the lever solenoid control pointer has a non-update code (here, -1) (step A2501). When the lever solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (step A2501; Y), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a non-update code (step A2501; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A2502), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (step A2503). ..

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A2503; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. When the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A2503; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A2504), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A2505). Then, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A2507), and the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A2508). After that, the probability variation operation area validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation area validity determination flag area (step A2509), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, ON / OFF of the lever solenoid 502 is set as shown in FIG. 159, and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is enabled or disabled. Set. When the operation of the lever solenoid 502 is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 502 is turned off and the probability variation operation area switch 460 is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. .. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

It should be noted that the arrival of the game ball at the V flow path 955a is delayed, and during the initial opening period (t31 to t32) of the door portion 521 in the V opening and the opening period (t51 to t52) of the door portion 521 in the short opening. In order to make it difficult for the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 to reach the V flow path 955a when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, a recess 471 is provided in the induction flow path 955 leading to the V flow path 955a. It may be provided to slow down the flow speed of the game ball.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), a game ball located behind the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 and guided to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is guided to the V flow path 955a side. The bent portion 470 is provided with a plurality of recesses 471 as shown in FIGS. 163 (b) and 163 (c). It is preferable that the corner of the recess 471 is a curved surface so as not to excessively obstruct the flow of the game ball.

Further, in the recess 471 of FIG. 163 (c), the wall surface on the flow direction side of the game ball is inclined as compared with the recess of FIG. 163 (b), so that the game ball can easily flow out from the recess 471 and the ball stops. Can be prevented. The portion where such unevenness is provided is not limited to the bent portion 470, and may be a portion of the induction flow path up to the V flow path 955a. Further, the flow speed of the game ball may be slowed down by increasing the number of bent portions before reaching the V flow path 955a. That is, the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a is provided with a flow speed reduction mechanism such as a recess 471 or a bent portion to reduce the flow speed and the ball power of the game ball flowing down as compared with the case without the flow speed reduction mechanism. , The time to reach the V flow path 955a is lengthened. Further, a protrusion may be provided on the bottom surface of the flow path leading to the V flow path 955a so that the game ball bounces, and the arrival timing to the V flow path 955a may be delayed.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). 97) A game in which a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The machine 10 includes a special variable winning device 38 that can convert the game ball into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and is converted into an open state in the special game state. Can win a game ball from the opening facing upward, and in the closed state, it protrudes forward to close the opening, making it impossible to win the game ball, and in the open state, it retracts backward and opens the opening. An opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction so as to enable winning of the game ball is provided, and in the closed state, the game ball can flow down on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. A projecting portion 992 projecting upward is provided on the upper surface capable of flowing down. Therefore, since the rolling mode of the game ball is changed by the protrusion 992, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area at an unintended timing, and it is possible to prevent the transition of the probability state different from the design value.

Further, the protruding portion 992 is provided at least at the front end portion in the slide direction on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. When the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state, the rolling mode of the game ball is changed by the protrusion 992, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game is provided, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific region (V flow path 955a) into which the game ball can flow in, and the game control means is special. Based on the fact that the game balls that have won the variable winning device 38 flow into the specific area, it is possible to generate a game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game balls do not flow into the specific area after the end of the special game state. The protruding portion 992 is formed so that the game ball in contact with the protruding portion 992 is guided away from the specific region when the opening / closing member 990 is converted into the open state. Therefore, since the player is guided away from the specific area, the player's anxiety can be aroused and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with a plurality of protruding portions 992 at intervals on the upper surface thereof, and when the opening / closing member 990 is converted into the open state, the game ball located on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is the protruding portion 992. The protrusion 992 is arranged so that it can pass through the space and flow down from the front end in the slide direction. Therefore, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is converted to the open state becomes various, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the protruding portion 992 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 can come into contact in the closed state, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as compared with the case where the protruding portion 992 is absent. It means that the time is set to be long. Therefore, since the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is set to be long, the possibility of winning the special variable winning device 38 is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example has a different configuration of the gaming area 32.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the game board 30 of this modified example, a plate-shaped partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31 from the upper side to the right side of the center case 40. The partition wall 531 is arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the outer peripheral wall 31. Further, the partition wall 531 is provided by the width from the front surface of the game board body to the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It extends forward.

Further, the distance between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 formed on the outer periphery of the center case 40 is also equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game balls can flow down on both sides of the partition wall 531. It is a region, and a first flow-down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 and a second flow-down region 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 are formed.

The lower end of the partition wall 531 is connected to the upper end of the guide portion 616. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the game ball can also flow down on the right side of the guiding portion 616, and the first flowing down region 541 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the outer peripheral wall 31 is the region on the right side of the guiding portion 616. It is formed so as to guide the game ball to the out opening 30a. The game ball flowing down the first flow-down area 541 does not win any of the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, the general winning opening 35, and the winning device 90, and the out opening 30a Will be guided to. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area 542 sandwiched between the partition wall 531 and the regulation wall 613 includes a normal drawing start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, a special variable winning device 38, and a general winning opening 35. , There is a possibility of winning the winning device 90. In this modified example, there is a possibility that the winning device 90 will be won even in the case of right-handed hitting, but in the case of right-handed hitting, the winning device 90 may not be won.

Whether to let the game ball flow into the first flow-down area 541 or the second flow-down area 542 can be selected by adjusting the firing force. The inflow ports of the first flow area 541 and the second flow area 542 are located above the center case 40, and the inflow port of the first flow area 541 is located above the inflow port of the second flow area 542. doing. Therefore, in order to aim for the inflow of the game ball into the second flow-down area 542, it is necessary to weaken the firing force as compared with the case where the game ball is made to flow into the first flow-down area 541.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a left-handed hit is performed, the firing force is adjusted to perform the game, but when a right-handed hit is performed, the operation unit 24 is only turned as much as possible. On the other hand, in the game board 30 of this modified example, it is necessary to adjust the firing force so as not to flow into the first flow-down area 541 even when performing a right-handed hit, and the game in the game state in which the right-handed hit is performed. You can improve your interest. Further, when the player stops the game while the game ball is left on the upper plate 21 in the game store, the clerk turns the operation unit 24 as much as possible to shoot the game ball and play the game to the first flow area 541. By inflowing the balls, it is possible to process the game balls without winning a prize in the winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 165, a part of the partition wall 531 is interrupted to provide a communication portion 532 in which the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 communicate with each other, and the area where the game ball flows down is changed. You may give it a possibility. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

By adjusting the distance between the ends of the partition wall 531 divided by the communication portion 532, it is possible to adjust the high possibility that the area where the game ball flows down will be changed. For example, the width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball may rarely change the area where the game ball flows down, or the area where the game ball flows down frequently may be changed at a sufficiently wide interval. can do. Further, by providing the guidance unit 533 that guides the game ball toward the communication unit 532, it is possible to increase the possibility that the area where the game ball flows down is changed. In the example of FIG. 165, the regulation wall 613 of the center case 40 forms a guide portion 533 that guides the game ball flowing down the second flow down region 542 to the communication portion 532, and the first flow down from the second flow down region 542. The possibility that the game ball moves to the area 541 is increased. Further, an obstacle such as a wind turbine may be provided in the communication portion 532.

Further, each of the partition walls 531 divided by the communication portion 532 is formed on the front surface of one base member 534. The base member 534 is arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and is fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. However, by providing a screw hole in the communication portion 532, screwing work is performed in a wide part without the partition wall 531. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the manufacturing work of the game board 30.

FIG. 166 shows another example of the game board 30 provided with the partition wall 531. As shown in FIG. 166, the first flow-down area 541 and the second flow-down area 542 may also have a possibility of winning a prize in the winning opening. With such a configuration, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right-handed game state can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. The game board 30 includes a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39 as special variable winning devices, and these can be opened alternately. Further, instead of the winning device 90, only the first starting winning opening 36 is provided. The method of the game is the same as that of the game board 30 of the first embodiment, and left-handed or right-handed is selected according to the game situation.

When the size of the center case 40 is reduced as in the game board 30, a wide space is created between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613. In this case, it is common to arrange obstacle members such as game nails and windmills in this space, but the timing and speed of the game ball that reaches the game area on the right side when hitting right due to the presence of the obstacle member. Will vary. For this reason, it becomes difficult to stably reach the game area on the right side, the stable winning of the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 is hindered, and the profit of the player is lowered. There is a risk.

Therefore, by dividing this space into a first flow-down area 541 and a second flow-down area 542 by a partition wall 531 so that the first flow-down area 541 can stably reach the game area on the right side without any obstacles. It is possible to make the route possible, and the second flow-down area 542 can be an area where the changing mode of the game ball due to the obstacle member can be enjoyed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure the profits of the player while enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166, by providing the first flow-down region 541 without an obstacle member on the upper side, the first flow-down region when the operation unit 24 is rotated to the maximum and the game ball is launched with the strongest firing force. It will flow into 541. Then, by setting the width of the first flow-down region 541 to allow the game balls to flow down in a row, the game balls heading to the left can always be received by the cushioning portion 545 provided on the outer peripheral wall 31. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a strong firing force from colliding with a portion other than the buffer portion 545, and it is possible to prevent damage to the game board 30.

In addition, when the special variable winning device 38 like the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided, in order to make the special variable winning device 38 win the game ball even with a short opening, the game ball is always placed on the opening / closing member 990. Need to stay. In order to do so, it is necessary to allow the game ball to reach the special variable winning device 38 at a stable and constant timing, but it is possible by providing the partition wall 531 as described above, and the benefit of the player is appropriate. Can be secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, the communication portion 532 may be provided in a range in which the game ball moves to the right. By doing so, the game ball that reaches the start end of the first flow-down area 541 but has a weak firing force falls from the communication portion 532 to the second flow-down area 542. As a result, the firing force that enables the first flow-down region 541 to flow down to the end is limited to a narrower range, and the timing of the game ball that reaches the special variable winning device 38 or the like can be further stabilized. it can. In this case, the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area 542 has a lower winning rate to the special variable winning device 38 or the like than the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area 541. It is preferable to make it disadvantageous.

Further, a winning opening or a gate through which a game ball falling from above can win may be provided at a position below the communication portion 532 in the second flow-down region 542. By doing so, the game ball flows into the winning opening or the gate only when the game ball is launched with a firing force that reaches the starting end of the first flow area 541 and with a firing force that causes the communication portion 532 to fall at a predetermined position. This will improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in FIGS. 164 to 167, the first flow down region 541 and the second flow down region 542 were formed by arranging the plate-shaped partition wall 531 between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613, but the cross section was formed. The first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 may be formed by a groove-shaped flow path forming member having a U-shape. In this case, the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be arranged so as to open to the front side so as to form the side wall and the back wall of the flow-down region, or the groove-shaped flow path forming member may be arranged on the rear side. It may be arranged so as to be open so as to form a side wall and a front wall of the flow-down region. Further, the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 may be formed by the tubular flow path forming member.

By doing so, it is possible to form the first flow-down region 541 and the second flow-down region 542 by a single flow path forming member without using the regulation wall 613 or the outer peripheral wall 31 of the center case 40. As a result, the frequency of collision of the game ball with the regulation wall 613 of the center case 40 or the like can be reduced, and the number of members to be discarded when reusing the constituent members of the game board can be reduced. Further, when the flow path forming member is damaged, only the flow path forming member needs to be replaced, and the repair cost can be reduced.

In addition, textual information such as explanation of the game content, information instructing not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, and information that a fraud prevention sensor is installed should be described in this flow path forming member. It is also possible to use a flow path forming member in which necessary character information is described. In this way, it is possible to change the character information more easily than printing on the surface of the game board.

Further, a plurality of partition walls 531 are provided between the outer peripheral wall 31 and the regulation wall 613 to provide three or more parallel flow-down areas so that the player can select the flow-down area to be flowed down by adjusting the firing force. You may. In this case, a sensor for detecting the flowing game ball may be provided in each flow-down area, and different effects may be given to the player according to the flow-down area in which the game ball flows down.

Further, although the starting end of the partition wall 531 is provided above the center case 40 and at a portion where the game ball faces to the right, it may be provided at a portion on the right side of the center case 40 where the game ball faces downward. .. Further, although the partition wall 531 is provided above and to the right of the center case 40, it may be provided at a place other than this.

Further, as a gaming machine for which the partition wall 531 is provided, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on a prize in the starting area as described above is mentioned, but it is also possible to provide a gaming machine for other gaming machines. .. For example, it is possible to win a prize in an auxiliary gaming device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called blade that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the inflow of the game ball winning in the auxiliary gaming device into a specific area. (Old 2 types) game machines may be used. In this case, the high possibility of winning a prize in the auxiliary game device or the high possibility of winning a prize in a specific area in the auxiliary game device may be different depending on the flow-down area in which the game ball flows down.

From the above, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening). In the game machine 10 in which the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to 97) and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the game is a special result, the game board 30 is a game area. An outer peripheral wall 31 that divides the outer periphery of the 32, a guide wall 491 that is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32, and a game area 32. A center case 40 provided substantially in the center is provided, a plate-shaped partition wall 531 is provided between the center case 40 and the outer peripheral wall 31, and a game ball can flow down on both sides of the partition wall 531. Regions (first flow region 541, second flow region 542) are formed. Therefore, it is possible to change the flow mode of the game ball and improve the interest.

Further, the guide path 490 is provided on one left and right side of the game area 32, and the partition wall 531 is provided on the left and right other sides of the game area 32, and the player adjusts the firing force to sandwich the partition wall 531. However, it is possible to select which of the flow areas formed on both sides the game ball is to flow into. Therefore, since the player can select the flow area to be flowed down, the interest can be improved.

Further, the partition wall 531 has an upstream end portion in the rolling direction of the game ball located above the center case 40. Therefore, it is possible to select a flow-down area to be flowed down above the center case 40, which is easily visible to the player.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a reflecting surface 550.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine of the present modification includes a reflecting surface 550 above the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and a part of the character string 551 that presents information to the player is formed on the reflecting surface 550. It is written so that it overlaps. The character string 551 that presents information to the player includes a display that encourages the player not to stare at the same light from a short distance for a long time, a warning character such as information that a fraud prevention sensor is installed, and the content of the game. And explanation of the operation method.

When such a character string 551 is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550, the player's attention is drawn to the reflective surface 550, which gives an impression different from the surroundings, and when the player sees the reflective surface 550. The character string 551 is also naturally seen, and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. In particular, since the first few characters of the character string 551 overlap the reflective surface 550, it becomes easy to start reading and information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Of course, only the characters other than the beginning of the character string 551 may overlap the reflective surface 550. The entire character string 551 may overlap the reflecting surface 550.

Further, the position where the reflective surface 550 is provided and the position where the character string 551 is described are the positions where the game ball passes, and the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 are naturally seen in the process of chasing the game ball. Therefore, information can be effectively transmitted to the player. Here, the character string 551 is arranged in the portion where the game ball moves to the right, and the reading direction of the character string 511 coincides with the moving direction of the game ball. This also makes it possible to read the character string 551 naturally. Of course, the moving direction of the game ball and the reading direction of the character string 551 may be different.

The reflective surface 550 is formed in a cell attached to the front surface of the game board main body 80, and a character string 551 is also printed on the cell. For example, it can be formed by processing the cell to have a metallic luster. Further, sheet-shaped lenses may be stacked. Further, a reflective member such as a mirror may be arranged on the front surface of the game board main body 80, and the front surface thereof may be covered with a transparent cell.

As a region to be projected by the reflecting surface 550, it is preferable that the entire face of the player 552 can be projected while sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 and playing a game as shown in FIG. 169 (a). It is possible to attract the player's interest by seeing his / her own face, increase the chances of seeing the reflective surface 550, and increase the chances of seeing the character string 551. Further, the upper body of the player 552 may be reflected. Further, if the left and right rear areas of the player can be projected, it can be confirmed that a clerk has come, for example, when exchanging the ball box.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the reflecting surface 550 may be capable of reflecting the left and right rear regions of the player. In this case, it is preferable to be able to visually recognize the state of the lamp on the front frame provided in the gaming machine 553 of the island equipment located behind the player. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the state of the gaming machine 553 located behind the player without turning around. Further, the light from the rear gaming machine 553 is reflected by the reflecting surface 550, so that the reflecting surface 550 is indirectly decorated and the character string 551 can be more noticed. Further, if the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror, a wide area can be projected with a small reflecting surface. Of course, it may be a concave mirror.

Further, it is preferable that the light from the light emitting member of the game machine 10 and the light from the lighting of the game store are not directly reflected by the reflecting surface 550 to the player. Regarding the light from the light emitting member of the game machine 10, the arrangement of the light emitting member and the radiation direction of the light are adjusted so that the light is reflected by the reflection surface 550 and is not emitted to the front of the game machine 10. Further, for light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 such as lighting of a game store, the reflecting surface 550 may be slightly downward, or the front periphery of the front frame 12 may be projected forward so that the light is incident on the reflecting surface 550. It can be dealt with by preventing.

Further, the position where the reflection surface 550 is provided is not limited to the position shown in the drawing. For example, the reflection surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the guide wall 491, and the character string 551 may be arranged along the guide wall 491. For example, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided in the vicinity of the outer peripheral wall 31, and the character string 551 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31. Further, the reflecting surface 550 may be provided on the guide portion 490, and the character string 551 may be arranged along the outer peripheral wall 31 or the guide wall 491. Further, a reflective surface 550 may be provided on the operating accessory, and character information may be superimposed on the reflective surface 550. In this case, the character string 551 includes a character string related to the production of the game (such as "super heat").

Further, the reflecting surface 550 may be used as a half mirror. In this case, a space is provided on the back surface side of the reflecting surface 550, and this space can be illuminated by the light emitting member. By doing so, if the light emitting member is turned off to darken the space, the reflecting surface 550 can be seen as a mirror by the player, and if the light emitting member is turned on to brighten the space, the reflecting surface 550 can be seen by the player. It becomes a state where the space can be visually recognized through.

Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be provided on the outside of the game area 32 of the game board 30, or may be provided on the front frame 12. Further, as a gaming machine provided with the reflecting surface 550 and the character string 551, a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on a prize in the starting region as described above is mentioned, but other gaming machines are also provided. Is possible. For example, it is possible to win a prize in an auxiliary gaming device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called blade that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the inflow of the game ball winning in the auxiliary gaming device into a specific area. (Old 2 types) game machines may be used. Further, the reflective surface 550 and the character string 551 may be arranged on a portion of the slot machine that is visible to the player.

From the above, the player can see the game on the gaming machine 10 that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A reflective surface 550 that reflects light is provided on the front surface, and a part of the character string 551 that presents information to the player is written so as to overlap the reflective surface 550. Therefore, by attracting the player's attention by the reflective surface 550, the player can be made aware of the existence of the character string 551, and information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflecting surface 550 has a function as a convex mirror. Therefore, the player's attention can be more drawn to the reflective surface 550, and the information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to project a wide range.

Further, the reflective surface 550 can project at least the entire face of the player who is playing the game. Therefore, the player's attention can be more drawn to the reflective surface 550, and the information can be effectively provided to the player.

Further, the reflective surface 550 can project the left and right rear regions of the player. Therefore, the player's attention can be more drawn to the reflective surface 550, and the information can be effectively provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to check the state behind the player.

Further, a game board 30 having a game area 32 on which the game ball can flow down is provided, a reflection surface 550 is provided in the game area 32, and the game ball can flow down in front of the reflection surface 550. .. Therefore, the player's attention can be more drawn to the reflective surface 550, and the information can be effectively provided to the player.

<Second Embodiment>
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same embodiment (configuration) as that of the first embodiment can be applied.

[Game board]
FIG. 170 is a front view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 170, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). .. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32).
Further, in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. Has been played. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 32).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the normal drawing starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97.
In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 is started by winning a prize in the winning opening (Public electric winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37. The winning memory (first starting memory) is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the first starting winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (the first special figure variable display game). is there. Then, the game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32), and when the game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 sets the game control device 100. Execute the special figure 1 variable display game immediately, or memorize the special figure 1 start winning memory.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of special figure 2).

The game control device (game control means) 100 controls the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 to be converted into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal variation display game. (Conversion control means) is connected (see FIG. 32). The details of the configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 37 will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 moves back and forth (slides) by the normal variable winning device 37 in the front-rear direction to win the ordinary variable winning device. It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes the game ball flow into the solenoid winning opening 37d). As the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening 37d by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c is provided. You may. The game control device 100 can open the movable member 37b via the normal electric solenoid 37c and allow the game ball to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. Change to an open state.

Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual. A time saving state (general electric support (electric support) state) is generated by lengthening the generation time of the winning easy state than the winning easy state generated in the game state.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40.
As shown in FIG. 17, the special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction. The special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32).

The special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment is different from the special variable winning device 38 of the first embodiment in that the general winning opening 35 is not provided, and the other points are the special variable winning device 38 of the first embodiment. Is the same as.
That is, in the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment, like the special variable winning device 38 of the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 990 closes the large winning opening 38d depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 990 retracts from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (advantageous state for the player) that can be accepted. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the game ball arriving at the special variation winning device 38 is guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992, and diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964. The guidance to is repeated, and it flows down from right to left while meandering back and forth. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows straight down. become longer. Therefore, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win the big winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, for example, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 bounces when it comes into contact with the protrusion 992 and is guided in a direction away from the large winning opening 38d. Will be done. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the grand prize opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game ball can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall without contacting the protrusions 992 through these intervals.
In this way, by providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In addition, in this embodiment, the special game state includes a big hit game state (second special game state) that can occur when the big hit mode (second special result) is reached, and a small hit mode (first special result). It shall include the small hit game state (first special game state) that can occur when the game becomes.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It is possible to control the execution of one variable display game (first special figure variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means that performs such control.
Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It is possible to control the execution of. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means that performs such control.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (second special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hit is high and the electric support is provided). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed in (Yes). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generating means that performs such control.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first starting winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37, special It is possible to aim for a prize in the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 arranged above the second starting winning opening 97.
Then, a game ball is inserted into any of the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the general winning opening 37d of the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening 38d of the special variable winning device 38. When a prize is won, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 32) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning prize opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21.

Further, in the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 171, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40, and also plays a game. It includes a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached.
The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess that opens forward, and inside the recess, a board effect device 44 that operates to produce a game is formed. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp flow path forming member 614, a stage portion 620, and the like.
Further, in addition to the front component 600, the game board main body 80 includes a general drawing start gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special variable. A winning device 38, a batch display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 170 and 171 on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won. The game ball that fails (specifically, the game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37) flows down through the flow path 615. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 catches a game ball flowing downward on the flow path 615, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 180.
FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG. 173 (b) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 173, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. It is provided with a flow path 37f in which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 37f is inclined so as to descend to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a row toward the right.
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 allows game balls to pass in a row inside the normal variable winning device 37 (specifically, inside a base portion composed of a front base member 373 and a rear base member 375). It is provided with a substantially U-shaped detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 172, the inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and the game ball. Will flow in from the flow-down road 37f to the detour 37g one by one through the inlet 37g1, and flow out from the detour 37g to the flow-down road 37f one by one through the outlet 37g2.

As shown in FIG. 172, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that projects rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protrusion 371b is a position where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f collide, and is arranged at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g. Therefore, the protrusion 371b blocks the flow of the game ball in the flow path 37f on the way (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow path 37f), thereby causing the game ball to detour 37g. It is designed to guide you. Since the protrusion 371b is provided in the middle of the flow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the flow path 37f unless it passes through the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 173, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the flow path 37f and the bottom surface of the detour 37g are formed by a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction.
As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the movable member 37b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (Public electric winning opening 37d), and is shown in FIG. 173 (b). As described above, it is possible to convert to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d by evacuating to the rear. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. If this is the case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the flow path 37f to the protruding portion 371b, collides with the protruding portion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g.
Further, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. If the movable member 37b is in the open state at that time, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f flows into the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state.
On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, but is normally a variable winning device 37. It advances to the outside and flows down to the guidance unit 616 through, for example, the flow down path 615. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that has failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37). ..
When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 172, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a universal solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a front decorative member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base. A rear cover member 377 that covers the rear surface of the member 375, a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a and the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decorative member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a, and the rear LED substrate 376a. Is provided with a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing the rear base member 375 to the rear surface.

At least the front decorative member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. A front LED substrate 372a is arranged behind the front decorative member 371 as a decorative means, and a rear LED substrate 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decorative means. It is possible to decorate.

The front decorative member 371 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 371c is a surface that can be seen by the player and is decorated. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c is a flow path front wall 371a forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 173, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) upstream side front wall protrusions 371d that project rearward are provided. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, a downstream side front wall protrusion 371e projecting rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing into the end point of the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other. Further, in the downstream front wall protrusion 371e, a game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside of the normal variable winning device 37) is downstream into the inside of the normal variable winning device 37 (downflow path 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

FIG. 174 (a) is a back view of the front decorative member 371.
As shown in FIG. 174 (a), a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decorative member 371. The extending wall 371f has a different function depending on the place where it is provided, and the bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end) of the flow path 37f). General electric winning opening forming part 371f2 forming the side wall or bottom of the general electric winning opening 37d, guiding flow path forming part 371f3 forming the guiding flow path 37e for guiding the game ball winning in the general electric winning opening 37d, starting port 2 switch It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting the 37a, and a peripheral wall 371f5 for preventing the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 from entering the inside.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f is an inclined surface inclined to the left side when viewed from the rear surface side.
The general electric winning opening forming portion 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the general electric winning opening 37d into the induction flow path 37e.
Game balls can flow into the guidance flow path 37e in a row, and a start port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion into the guidance flow path 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the general electric winning port 37d will flow into the induction flow path 37e after being detected by the start port 2 switch 37a. The guidance flow path 37e formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general electric winning opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. 371 g of ribs for guiding backward are formed.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are arranged inside the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 (a portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5).
Further, a portion of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to processing for scattering light (concavo-convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 174 (a)). This makes it possible to effectively decorate the normally variable winning device 37 with the light from the front LED substrate 372a and the rear LED substrate 376a, and also decorate the front LED substrate 372a itself, the front substrate holder 372, and the like. It is difficult to see through the front decorative member 371 from the front of the member 371.
Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), there are a plurality of holes for releasing heat such as the front LED substrate 372a in the lower portion of the front base member 373 (7 in the example shown in FIG. 174 (b)). It is provided. These holes are also made difficult to see from the front of the front decorative member 371 due to the processing applied to the front decorative member 371 to scatter the light.

As shown in FIG. 172, the front base member 373 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decorative member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decorative member 371 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 37f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a, a movable member insertion portion 373c penetrating the front and rear for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall protrusions 373d projecting forward are provided on the front surface side of the front base member 373. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and the upstream front wall is behind each of the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream of the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

FIG. 174 (b) is a back view of the front base member 373.
As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the guide flow path 37e is located on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b at the central portion of the rear surface portion 373b and facing the portion of the front decorative member 371 where the guide flow path 37e is formed. A penetrating portion 373e penetrating back and forth is formed so as to communicate with the side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The function of the extending wall 373f is different depending on the place where the wall is provided, and functions as a guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forming the guide flow path 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 forming the periphery of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Have.

The guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game ball flowing into the penetration portion 373e to the rear. Further, a rib 373g for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the lower end portion of the guidance flow path forming portion 373f1.
The lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed on the lower end portion are inclined surfaces whose upper surfaces are lowered rearward, and the game balls flowing into the penetrating portion 373e are received by these upper surfaces and rearward. It is designed to guide you to. The guided game ball flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine 10.

The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed to match the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 172, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction.
Further, as shown in FIG. 172, a pair of movable members 37b that move in the front-rear direction are guided and supported at positions facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. The movable member holding portion 375b of the above is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged at a predetermined interval (gap 375c) so that they can come into contact with the lower surface of the movable member 37b and can guide and support the movable member 37b. It is provided so as to extend along the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 172, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached to the front surface side of the rear base member 375. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction, a normal electric solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a that transmits a driving force from the general electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is projected forward as shown in FIG. 173 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 173 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the general electric winning opening 37d via the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 175 (b) is a front view of the movable member unit 37b. Further, FIG. 176 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 176 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b.
As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable member 37b is located at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, the first middle stage portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper stage portion 37b1, and the first middle stage portion 37b2. The second middle stage portion 37b3 provided and the lower stage portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle stage portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is designed to flow down from left to right.

The upper end portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f. The flow path forming portion of the upper portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion of the upper portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. Further, the lower wall protruding portion 37b5 extends forward from the right end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protrusion 37b5 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f can come into contact with each other.

In the first middle stage portion 37b2, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f, and the front end thereof. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is regarded as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the first middle stage portion 37b2, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first middle stage portion 37b2 is inclined so that the rear end is located below the front end. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the game ball is likely to roll from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g.
Further, on the upper surface of the first middle stage portion 37b2, a meandering left ridge portion 37b6 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

The second middle stage portion 37b3 is a protruding portion 371b in which the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d guides the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f to the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. It is placed directly under.

In the lower portion 37b4, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state forms the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the flow path 37f). The flow path forming portion is formed, and the portion other than the front end portion (that is, the portion other than the flowing down path forming portion) is the detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower portion 37b4, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower end portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end portion is located above the front end portion, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the game ball is likely to roll from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2.
Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4, a meandering right ridge portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with a rising portion such as a lower wall protrusion 37b5, a left protrusion 37b6, and a right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decorative member 371 is provided with a rising portion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a rising portion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. .. With such a rising portion, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is placed on the holding portion 373h by abutting on the upper surface of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 176 (b), a connecting pin 37b9 projecting downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), a penetrating portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip end portion (lower end portion) of the connection pin 37b9 into the penetration portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 176 (b), in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front side and the rear side of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. A guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide ribs 37b10 include a gap 373i (see FIG. 174 (b)) formed along the front-rear direction between the pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into the gap 375c (see FIG. 172) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into these gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction.
That is, by fitting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the movable member 37b moves. Can be limited to movement in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is attached to one end thereof. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end portion. Further, the slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the normal solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a recess 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted, and the convex portion 374b2 is inserted into the concave portion 374a1. The slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected with each other.
Further, a rotation shaft 374b3 along the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b can rotate around the rotation shaft 374b3. The rotation shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by the rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the slider 374a has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 374a2 orthogonal to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a main body portion. It is configured to include a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a protruding piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a is extended (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. To do.

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), a recessed portion 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recessed portion 373j, and the protruding piece 374a5 is inserted into the recessed portion 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to.
Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a comes into contact with the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373 from the rear. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When converting the movable member 37b from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal solenoid solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 is extended, the slider 374a slides to the right and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise with respect to the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. The movable member 37b projects forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 173 (a)), and the game ball cannot be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is converted from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 37b9 faces backward. The movable member 37b moves and retracts backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 173 (b)), and the game ball can be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

FIGS. 177 to 180 show the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37. Note that in FIGS. 177 to 180, some members are not shown for the sake of explanation.
The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) is first guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then on the upstream side. It is guided diagonally forward by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at, and flows into the front end portion of the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall protrusion 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. It is guided diagonally forward by the lower wall protrusion 37b5 and flows into the front end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball meanders back and forth and flows down the flow path 37f. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the flow path 37f has no starting parts such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d and flows down linearly. The time will be longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protruding portion 371b and is guided to the rear side by the protruding portion 371b and the first middle stage portion 37b2 that is inclined backward. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g.
As shown in FIG. 178, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling around a detour 37g from the first middle stage portion 37b2 to the lower stage portion 37b4, and a lower stage portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e that guides the top from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle stage portion 37b2 and flows into the rear base member 375 as shown in FIG. 178, it is guided to the right side by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. 179, and is guided to the lower stage. It flows into the portion 37b4.

The game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward as shown in FIG. 180, and is shown in FIG. 177 (b). As described above, the water flows from the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the flow path 37f (the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4).
Here, since the meandering left ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle stage portion 37b2, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls the upstream portion of the detour 37g to the rear side. Further, since the lower portion 37b4 is formed with a meandering right ridge portion 37b7, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls forward in the downstream portion of the detour 37g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the front base member 373 is provided with a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g, and is upstream of the detour 37g among the rear end portions of the partition wall 373k. An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. Is done.
As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the detour 37g has no starting parts such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and rolls linearly. become longer.

As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like, and the detour 37g is provided with the left protrusion 37b6 and the left protrusion 37b6. Since the rising portion such as the right protrusion portion 37b7 and the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Further, by providing these starting parts, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these starting parts, when the movable member 37b is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b into the normal electric winning opening 37d can be shifted, and the general electric power can be provided. It is possible to prevent ball clogging in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the flow path 37f and first flows into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b.
If the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b is not opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g. Even if not, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g and heads for the exit 37g2.
Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 It becomes a game ball that advances to the outside (game area 32) and fails to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 174 (b)) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of meandering the game ball to prolong the residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of ensuring a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling around the detour 37g.
For example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the downstream portion (that is, on the lower portion 37b4) of the detour 37g, the game ball is with the movable member 37b. The game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance or contact with the right ridge 37b7 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during the process.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the game ball is movable. Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left ridge portion 37b6, etc., the game ball is drawn to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball rolls the upstream portion of the detour 37g. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during movement.
On the other hand, since the ordinary variation winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game ball moves to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the portion is being rolled, a sufficient residence time on the movable member 37b of the game ball can be secured.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which a gaming ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a winning area (in the case of this embodiment, the Fuden winning opening 37d) in which a gaming ball flowing down 32 can be won, a closed state in which the winning area is closed, and an open state in which the winning area is opened. Member 37b), a flow path (flow path 37f) through which the game ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the game ball, and a game ball that rolls (flows down) through the flow path. It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides the region. Then, the flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the opening / closing member in the closed state, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space, and the staying area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening / closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , The game ball that has been guided by the guidance unit and has flowed in from the flow path through the communication port (entrance 37g1) of the plurality of communication ports is combined with the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out to the flow path through different communication ports (exit 37g2).

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 through which a gaming ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the gaming machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a gaming area. The winning area (Public winning slot 37d) where the gaming ball flowing down 32 can win, and the closed state where the gaming ball cannot win or is difficult to win by sliding back and forth, and the gaming ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which a winning ball can be won, a first flow path (downflow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball that rolls (flows down) in the flow path to the second flow path. The first flow path is formed on the front surface side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the slide member is in the closed state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the slide member. It is a communication port formed on the rear surface side and having both ends communicating with the first flow path, and has been guided by an induction portion and has flowed in from the first flow path through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) at both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the other communication port (outlet 37g2) at both ends.

That is, the ordinary variation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37 g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 37 g (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the decrease of the game ball in the predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state) is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 having the game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can use the game ball in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decorative member 371 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is sufficiently visible. You can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable winning device is, for example, a detour 37g (retention area, second flow path) in the flow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable winning device 38 of the first embodiment or the present embodiment. A flow path) may be added.
Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which the winning opening is closed and an open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be changed as appropriate. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 181A (a), a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is provided as the opening / closing member. For example, as shown in FIG. 181A (b), it may be a rotating member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by rotating around the rotating shaft Z.

Further, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the retention region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space in which the partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g is removed from the detour 37g. , The space may be a space in which a portion of the partition wall 373k other than the front end portion (the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) is removed from the detour 37g.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and one of them communicates with the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to provide a height difference (in the case of the present embodiment, a step or an inclination) so that the mouth is arranged at a position higher than the other communication port.
With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour 37g), so that the first flow path and the second flow path can be smoothly rolled. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the ball power of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b) on the first flow path (flow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour 37g). (In the case of this embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7) can be provided.
With this configuration, it is possible to further prolong the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), so that a predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, a time saving state) ) It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as a ball power suppressing portion, a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, and other starting parts (convex parts) are provided in the flow path 37f, and a detour 37g. The left ridge portion 37b6, the right ridge portion 37b7, the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 and the like are provided with a rising portion (convex portion), but the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, a down portion (recess) may be provided in the flow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove that meanders may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a prone portion, and the game ball may be configured to roll while meandering along the groove.
Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, undulations (both the undulating portion and the undulating portion) may be provided in the flow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations.
Further, the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to the rising portion (convex portion) and the down portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to the retention device having the game ball retention function (normal variation winning device 37), the members for suppressing the ball power (obstacle nail, windmill, flow path 615, guide portion 616). Etc.), that is, a retention member having a game ball retention function is provided. Therefore, since the game ball can be retained in the right game area by the retention device and the retention member, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be more enjoyed.
In addition, a method of retaining the game ball by providing unevenness on the surface, a method of retaining the game ball by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and a method of performing a constant operation with the driving force of a driving source (solenoid, etc.) are used for the game. A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.
Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 can hold the game ball in the front-rear direction of the game machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, the holding member (a holding device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used. ) Is preferably configured so that the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-back direction (horizontal direction or vertical direction of the game machine 10). As a result, the pachinko machine can be three-dimensionally stagnated by the dwelling member (and / or the dwelling device other than the normal variable winning device 37) and the normal variable winning device 37, so that the dwelling time can be increased. At the same time, the interest in the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Further, an out port 30c, a general winning opening 35, or the like (hereinafter referred to as "out port 30c or the like") may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game ball that has failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37, which improves the interest and the ball is released. It is possible to adjust so that the rate does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the detour 37g.
Further, when the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, the game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 181B, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms a detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (may be in the closed state), the positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c in the vertical direction coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is located directly above the out port 30c). When the game ball on the movable member 37b is in a state where it can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c move up and down. It is also possible to configure the game balls on the movable member 37b to be unable or difficult to flow into the out port 30c because the positions of the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c). is there.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described.
FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment. FIG. 182 summarizes each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state in each game state.
In the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each game state will be described.
In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to a low probability, and controls so that there is no general electric support (electric support).
Further, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode.
Also, in the normal game state, left-handed is recommended as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is set to a high probability and the normal electric support is provided (the number of times of support is 50). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it can be said that the conversion control by the normal electric solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is controlled to be executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. ..

Further, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability change mode.
Further, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched to the right. Since it becomes easier to win a prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize in the Fuden winning opening 37d, the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 sets the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to a high probability, and controls so that the normal electric support is not provided. That is, when the transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state is made, the conversion control by the normal electric solenoid 37c (conversion control means) is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and the probability of the special figure is It can be said that the state is set to a high probability state.

Further, in the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the small hit RUSH. In the case of the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific game state, the small hit RUSH is in a state where small hits are likely to occur continuously in a short period of time. It can be said that. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second specific game state is executed, a small hit (first special result) can be derived as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game.
Further, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched to the right. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 controls so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is set to a low probability and the normal electric support is provided (the number of times of support is 50).
Further, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode.
Further, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched to the right. Since it becomes easier to win a prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize in the Fuden winning opening 37d, the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described.
It is assumed that a big hit occurs in a normal game state. When the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

If a big hit occurs in the first specific game state and the big hit is a normal big hit, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state after the big hit game state ends. .. Further, when the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the first specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first specific gaming state again after the jackpot gaming state ends.
On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the normal electric support ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state (“High support regulation” in FIG. 182. "Number of times" is over. "High support" means that the probability of hitting is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, as a transition condition to another game state, there is a case where the occurrence of a big hit game state (second special game state) is a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of times of normal electric power. In some cases, support (execution of the variable display game) is a condition (second transition condition). With this configuration, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs in the normal gaming state. In this first specific gaming state, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated. When the above-mentioned second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

If a jackpot occurs in the second specific gaming state and the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. .. Further, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the second specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (second special gaming state) is a condition for transition to another gaming state.

If a big hit occurs in the third specific game state and the big hit is a probability variation big hit, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state after the big hit game state ends. .. Further, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the third specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the third specific gaming state again after the jackpot gaming state ends.
On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the normal electric support ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (“low support specified number of times” in FIG. 182 is set. "End". Note that "low support" means that the probability of hitting is low and there is electric support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific game state, since the normal electric support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, it is possible to easily generate a big hit. And it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. In the second specific game state, although the Fuden support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start winning opening 97. Here, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIG. 184). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, the "small hit RUSH" mode in which the small hit gaming state (first special gaming state) is frequently generated until the next big hit gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs. Can be executed. Then, since it is possible to increase the number of balls to be played in a gaming state other than the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

Further, in the second specific game state, there is no normal electric support as in the normal game state, but in the second specific game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state. Is set to. Therefore, in the second specific game state, the special figure 2 variable display game in which a large number of small hit game states (first special game states) are allocated can be executed at a good tempo.

Here, in the present embodiment, the average value of the fluctuation time (execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game) in the fluctuation pattern table of each game state is the second specific game state <the first specific game state and the third specific game state. The specific gaming state <normal gaming state, and the types of variation patterns that can be selected in the second specific gaming state are less than the types of variation patterns that can be selected in the normal gaming state. That is, the smaller the types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected, the smaller the average value of the fluctuation time. If there are many types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the second specific game state (that is, the average value of the fluctuation time is large), it is not possible to generate small hits at a good tempo, and the ball output rate becomes 100% or more. However, as in the present embodiment, by reducing the types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the second specific gaming state (that is, reducing the average value of the fluctuation time), a small hit can be made at a good tempo. It is possible to generate a ball output rate according to the design value.

Further, since the jackpot probability is set to a high probability in the second specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs at an appropriate timing, and the transition condition to another gaming state is satisfied. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in ball output due to the excessive continuation of the second specific gaming state.

Since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function of retaining the game ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the game ball is retained on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is opened, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is dropped to win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable winning device 37, that is, the game balls that cannot win the general electric winning opening 37d even though they have arrived at the ordinary variable winning device 37.
Further, since the second start winning opening 97 is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning opening 97. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game state in which the main starting area is the general electric winning opening 37d (the first). In the specific game state (1) and the third specific game state), it is possible to make it difficult for the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize.

The main starting area of the high / low probability support state (first specific game state, third specific game state) is the general electric winning opening 37d, and the main of the high probability support non-state (second specific game state). Since the starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, it is impossible (difficult) to win the second starting winning opening 97 when there is a high / low probability support, and the second start is made only when there is no high probability support. It is preferable that the winning opening 97 can be won. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs in the right-handed support state (first specific game state, third specific game state), the ball output rate is large from the design value. There is a risk of divergence.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to the start of the operation and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow path 37f). By adjusting (time required for) etc., the failure to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is made almost 0, that is, the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is It is also possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting winning opening 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball output rate).

The winning rate for the ordinary variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won in the Fuden winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) x 100 ... (1) )
On the other hand, when there is no high probability support (second specific game state), the normal variable winning device 37 does not open, so that the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 97, and a small hit RUSH is realized. can do.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize only when there is no high probability support (second specific gaming state), and the desired performance can be realized. ..

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (a), the normal map fluctuation time (that is, the normal map fluctuation time) is 200 msec, and the normal map stop time (that is, the normal map display time) is 100 msec. Yes, the normal power operation time (that is, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time per hit state of the normal figure) is 5800 msec, and the ending time (that is, the normal power remaining ball). When the sum of the processing time and the ending time of the normal figure is 700 msec, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 msec (= 700 msec + 200 msec + 100 msec).
In this case, the length of the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the undulations provided on the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, etc. are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. By approaching to, it becomes possible to make the winning rate of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, the winning rate of the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing becomes almost 100% according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation. , The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate of the movable member 37b becomes almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation to the start of the operation of the movable member 37b is the time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). By setting the time, the time equal to or longer than the other, etc.), the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased.
In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the portion that suppresses the ball power such as the rising portion and the fusube portion, the operation is performed from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b during the interval of the normal electric power. (Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the movable member 37b are awarded a prize. Therefore, the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the ordinary variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 should be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retention function. Can be done.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid the unrecommended striking method and increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

Left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state, but when the right-handed hit is made and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97 in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set longer than that in the second specific game state. It is possible to win a game ball.
That is, when the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state. In addition, by performing aiming such as starting to hit the game ball at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening), the game ball is made to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. It is possible to win a prize in the big prize opening.
Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state, there is a possibility that a non-recommended striking method (right striking) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the game ball is started to be hit at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening), the game ball is started. Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. Therefore, it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state. Therefore, the method of executing the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state, that is, the method not recommended in the normal game state is recommended. Can be avoided.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal winning by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right-handed in a normal game state, and a small hit is made by aiming to win a small hit (a prize in a large winning opening during a small hit period). ) Can be prevented.

In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winning due to capture (avoids unrecommended hitting methods). ), It was necessary to set a limit on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit game state, such as performing the short opening only once.
On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened multiple times during the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture, so that the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state can be increased. it can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, and arrives at the special variable winning device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds.
In such a case, if the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 183 (b), that is, the pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the small hit Even if you aim to hit the game ball at the start of the game state, the small hit game state is finished by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, so the game ball will be in the big winning opening. I can't win a prize.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 183 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0". If the pattern is "5 seconds open state-> 1.0 seconds closed state-> 0.5 seconds open state", the small hit game state can be achieved by aiming at the start of the small hit game state and starting to hit the game ball. Since the game ball can be delivered to the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the above, the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening.
Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern for opening the large winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern for the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is not possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. On the other hand, as an opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times is adopted, that is, the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state is increased. If this is possible, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state), but this cannot be achieved due to illegal winning due to capture.

In order to prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve small hit performance, a retention device that delays the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (in the present embodiment). In this case, a normal variable winning device 37) or the like will be provided. If the retention device delays by 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38.

As a result, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 183 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state". In the case of the pattern of "→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state", it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 second + 1.0 second + 0.5 second + 1.0) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends. It takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. That is, in the present embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state. In addition, the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 can be determined according to the opening / closing pattern (opening pattern of the large winning opening) of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state.

The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this) rather than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state (3.5 seconds in this example). In the example, by lengthening (about 4 seconds), even if you aim to hit the game ball at the same time as the start of the small hit game state, the small hit game will be played by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. The state has ended. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, while preventing illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time, the longer the total time of the small hit game state can be extended, so that the small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable winning device 38, so that it becomes difficult to illegally win a prize by capturing.
Further, providing such a retention device or the like is effective not only for aiming during normal electric support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired even in the operation of the hall.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, a right-handed hit is made to win the second start winning opening 97 to generate a small hit, and then the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal figure is drawn. When is hit, the game ball retention function of the normal variable power winning device 38 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game balls are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize.
That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37 (it can be difficult to make the special variable winning device 38 win), so that the illegal winning is illegal. Damage caused by can be minimized.

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, not only the small hit performance can be improved (increased ball output in the small hit game state), but also the large winning opening 38d is opened. Since it is possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the large winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved.
The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device. The arrival time is just the average value of the measured values, and of course, there is an error in the actual arrival time.

In addition, the alert (error notification) to be performed when the ball is hit right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. , It may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the normal number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in motivation to play because the player is immediately alerted even if he accidentally hits the right side.
Further, in the normal game state, the counter that counts the game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the counter that counts the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to update by -1 each time the first start winning opening 36 is won.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the normal figure game process (step S110) is performed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 38), the normal figure variation display game can be executed. Then, when the normal fluctuation display game is in the winning mode, the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, and the game ball wins in the general fluctuation winning opening 37d, so that the special figure 1 changes. The display game can be started.

In particular, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, the normal power support is executed (see FIG. 182). In the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated by the Fuden support (electric support), and the hit probability is high, so that a big hit is likely to occur. be able to. Further, even in the third specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated by the Fuden support.

FIG. 184 is a table illustrating the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the missed probability, and the probability variation probability in the present embodiment. These tables show the jackpot probability (probability that the judgment result becomes a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result becomes a small hit), and the miss probability (probability that the judgment result becomes a miss) by the jackpot judgment process and the small hit judgment process. ), The probability of change (probability change inrush rate) is shown for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 184 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 184 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 184 (c) shows the probability variation inrush rate.

Also in this embodiment, the jackpot probability (the probability of occurrence of a jackpot) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.
Further, the small hit probability (small hit occurrence probability) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It is also possible to increase the small hit probability in the high probability state and decrease it in the low probability state. For example, in the low probability state, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game may be set to "0".
In addition, the probability of loss (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a jackpot mode (second) in the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). It includes a probability setting means that can control a low probability state in which the probability that a special result) is derived is set to a low probability and a high probability state in which a probability higher than this low probability state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the loss probability is lower than that in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning a prize in the second starting winning opening 97.

Here, also in the present embodiment, as the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like. ing.
Then, in the case of the present embodiment, in step A458 (FIG. 65) of the special figure information setting process (step A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 58), the effect mode information is set when the effect mode information is in the low probability state. In the case of information related to the effect mode, the latter half variation group selection pointer for long-term variation is acquired as the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information. Long fluctuation). On the other hand, when the effect mode information is information about the effect mode set when the effect mode information is in the high probability state, the latter half variation group for the fluctuation of the normal variation time is used as the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information. Since the selection pointer is acquired, the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 2 has a fluctuation of a normal fluctuation time (a short fluctuation as compared with a long fluctuation). As a result, in the second specific game state, which is a high-probability state, small hits occur more frequently in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the normal game state, which is a low-probability state (small hit RUSH). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation A, 16R normal B, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal variation are set as jackpot patterns.
Then, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot state ends, the probabilistic state or the normal state is reached. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the 16R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. Both display games are 60%. That is, the probability variation inrush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit is completed, the time reduction of 50 rotations and the general electric support are executed.

The 16R probability variation inrush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 variation display game, 40% for the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 variation display game. The distribution of the number of jackpot rounds in the probabilistic state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be set to be different, such that the variable display game in FIG. 2 is 22%. With this configuration, if a probabilistic big hit is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to acquire a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so that more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the player's willingness to play a game ball, the degree of expectation for winning a probabilistic jackpot can also be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot may reduce the player's motivation to play, but it is possible to acquire a sufficient game ball even with this probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, while maintaining the player's motivation to play, it becomes possible to give a new motivation to play to rush into the small hit RUSH again.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the start port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 185 is performed instead of the start port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 51. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, the processes of steps A101 to A103 are performed. Since the processes of steps A101 to A103 are the same as those in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when there is a prize in the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36), which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A103; Y), the game is in the normal gaming state (low probability of the special figure & no time saving). ) (Step A104a).

When not in the normal gaming state (step A104a; N), the process proceeds to step A105. Since the processes of steps A105 to A106 are the same as those in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted.
In the case of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) must be left-handed to win a prize. In the normal gaming state, left-handing is recommended, and the first to third specific gaming states are used. Right-handed is recommended. Therefore, when there is a prize in the first starting port when not in the normal gaming state (that is, when the player is hit left during the first to third specific gaming states), the right-handed instruction notification command is produced and controlled. The effect control device 300 is configured to send a notification (warning) to the device 300 to instruct it to hit right.

On the other hand, when the game is in the normal gaming state (step A104a; Y), the process proceeds to step A107. Since the processes of steps A107 to A113 are the same as those in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when there is a prize in the second starting port (Public electric winning opening 37d) which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A111; Y), and the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112). Y), or when there is a prize in the second starting port (Public electric winning opening 37d), which is the starting port in FIG. 1 (step A111; Y), and the normal electric accessory is not in operation. In the case of (step A112; N) and no illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state (low probability of special figure & no time reduction) (step A124a). In the present embodiment, since the general electric winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area and the second starting winning opening 97 corresponds to the second starting winning area, the second starting opening ( The Fuden winning opening 37d) is the starting opening of Special Figure 1.

In the normal gaming state (step A124a; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A125a), an effect command setting process (step A126a) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A114.
In the case of the present embodiment, the second starting opening (Public winning opening 37d) must be hit right to win a prize, and left-handed is recommended in the normal gaming state, and in the first to third specific gaming states. Right-handed is recommended. Therefore, when there is a prize in the second starting port during the normal game state (that is, when the player is hit right during the normal game state), a left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike left.

On the other hand, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step A124a; N), the process proceeds to step A114. Since the processes of steps A114 to A118 are the same as those in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when there is a prize in the third starting port (second starting winning opening 97) which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118; Y), the normal gaming state (low probability of the special figure & no time saving) is in progress. ) (Step A119a).

In the normal gaming state (step A119a; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120a), and the process proceeds to step A121. Since the processes of steps A121 to A123 are the same as those in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted.
In the case of the present embodiment, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) must be hit right to win a prize, and left-handed is recommended in the normal gaming state, and the first to third specific gaming states are used. Right-handed is recommended. Therefore, when there is a prize in the third start port during the normal game state (that is, when the player is hit right during the normal game state), a left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike left.
On the other hand, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step A119a; N), the process proceeds to step A122.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 186 is performed instead of the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 53. This special figure start port switch common process is different from the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 53 in that the process of step A155 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156) regardless of whether or not the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) is won, and the RWM is small. It is saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step A157). Since the processes of steps A141 to A154 and A156 to 160 are the same as those in FIG. 53, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. 187 is performed instead of the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. 54. This special figure reservation information determination process is different from the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. 54 in that the process of step A165 is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit determination process (step A166) is performed regardless of whether or not the player has won the first start opening (first start winning opening 36). Since the processes of steps A161 to A164 and A166 to 176 are the same as those in FIG. 54, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 188 is performed instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 59. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A361a), and the process proceeds to the process of step A362. Since the processes of steps A362 to A369 are the same as those in FIG. 59, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361a. Save (step A370a) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 189 is performed instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 60. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A361b), and the process proceeds to the process of step A371. Since the processes of steps A371 to A376 are the same as those in FIG. 60, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the small hit determination process (step A368b) is performed.

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A368b) is a small hit (step A369b; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A361b. (Step A370b), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368b) is not a small hit (step A369b; N), the large hit flag 2 is set while the loss information is saved in both the large hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area. End the process.

[Small hit judgment processing]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit determination process shown in FIG. 190 is performed instead of the small hit determination process shown in FIG. 62. In this small hit determination process, first, the process of step A391 is performed. Since the process of step A391 is the same as that of FIG. 62, the description thereof will be omitted.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A395a).
When the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A395a; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step A396a), and the process proceeds to the process of step A392. ..

On the other hand, when the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A395a; N), that is, when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. After setting (step A397a), the process proceeds to step A392. Since the processes of steps A392 to A394 are the same as those in FIG. 62, the description thereof will be omitted.
In this way, when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of Special Figure 1, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special Figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, and when the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of Special Figure 2, it is special. By setting the small hit upper limit determination value for the variable display game of FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 184, the small hit probability can be made different between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. ..

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 191 is performed instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 63. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A401 is performed. Since the process of step A401 is the same as that of FIG. 63, the description thereof will be omitted.
When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A401; Y), the process proceeds to step A402. Since the processes of steps A402 to A409 and A418 to A423 are the same as those in FIG. 63, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A410a), and when it is a small hit (step A410a; Y), step A411 Move to the processing of. Since the processes of steps A411 to A415 are the same as those in FIG. 63, the description thereof will be omitted.
If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A410a; N), the process proceeds to step A416. Since the processes of steps A416 to A417 are the same as those in FIG. 63, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 192 is performed instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, the process of step A431 is performed. Since the process of step A431 is the same as that of FIG. 64, the description thereof will be omitted.
When the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the process proceeds to step A432. Since the processes of steps A432 to A439 and A442 to A446 are the same as those in FIG. 64, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, after the process of step A446, a process (step A423b) of clearing the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A410b), and when it is a small hit (step A410b; Y), a special figure Load the small hit symbol random number from the 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411b), set the special figure 2 small hit symbol table (step A412b), and correspond to the loaded small hit symbol random number. The stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A413b), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414b), and the stop symbol pattern is obtained. The effect mode transition information corresponding to (step A415b) is saved (step A415b), and the process proceeds to step A442.
On the other hand, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A410b; N), the process proceeds to step A440. Since the processes of steps A440 to A441 are the same as those in FIG. 64, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Processing during special figure display]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the special figure display process shown in FIG. 193 is performed instead of the special figure display process shown in FIGS. 71 and 72. In this special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are set. The small hit flag 2 and the like are loaded (step A701a), the small hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702), and the process proceeds to the process of step A703. Since the processes of steps A703 to A724 are the same as those in FIG. 71, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, when the loaded big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A725a).

When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A725a; Y), the process proceeds to step A726. On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A725a; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A725b).
If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A725b; N), the process proceeds to step A735. Since the processing of steps A735 to A741 is the same as that in FIG. 72, the description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A725b; Y), the process proceeds to step A726. Since the processes of steps A726 to A727 are the same as those in FIG. 72, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, after the process of step A727, the process proceeds to the process of step A729 without performing the process of determining whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step A728). Since the processes of steps A729 to A734 are the same as those in FIG. 72, the description thereof will be omitted. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special figure is in high probability, the decorative special figure command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. ), Prepare a small hit fanfare command (step A731), and perform the effect command setting process (step A732).

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the time reduction variation number update process shown in FIG. 194 is performed instead of the time reduction variation number update process shown in FIG. 73. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, the processes of steps A752 to A758 are performed. Since the processes of steps A752 to A758 are the same as those in FIG. 73, the description thereof will be omitted.
Then, after the processing of step A758, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (in the high probability state) (step A751a). When the special figure is not in the high probability (step A751a; N), that is, in the third specific gaming state (the special figure low probability & time saving state), the processes of steps A759 to A761 are performed. Since the processes of steps A759 to A761 are the same as those in FIG. 73, the description thereof will be omitted. As a result, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with a low support specified number of times.

On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step A751a; Y), that is, in the first specific game state (high probability of special figure & state with time saving), the special figure is set in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the high probability & no time saving flag (step A762a), save the signal related to the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (step A763a), and save the number in the right-handed state in the game status display number 2 area. (Step A764a), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed. As a result, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state with a high support specified number of times.
In addition, both the gaming state before shifting to the high support specified number of times (first specific gaming state) and the gaming state after shifting to the high support specified number of times (second specific gaming state) are in the right-handed gaming state. Therefore, the processing of steps A763a to A764a may be omitted.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the jackpot end setting process 1 shown in FIG. 195 is performed instead of the jackpot end setting process 1 shown in FIG. 85.
Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set when the high-probability state is reached (step A1201). Then, when the data is not high probability data (step A1201; N), that is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a normal big hit, the big hit end setting process 1 is performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, in any of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, if the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, a third specification is made. It shifts to the game state.
That is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a normal big hit, the big hit end setting process 1 is performed to shift to the third specific game state.

Specifically, in the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal related to the start with low probability & time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221a), and the signal related to the start with low probability & time saving is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step A1222a).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227a), the low-probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A1228a), and the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area. The number inside is saved (step A1229a), and the process proceeds to step A1223. Since the processing of steps A1223 to A1226 is the same as that in FIG. 85, the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of times of support is 50, in step A1226, "50" is saved as the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations in the time reduction fluctuation number region.

By doing so, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data after the end of the big hit game state, the hit probability is set to low probability and the normal electric support is provided. It is possible to shift to the specific gaming state of 3.

Here, when the big hit is a normal big hit in the normal game state, the state shifts from the normal game state which is the left-handed game state to the third specific game state which is the right-handed game state.
If the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the first specific gaming state, the state shifts from the first specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, to the third specific gaming state, which is a right-handing gaming state.
If the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the second specific gaming state, the state shifts from the second specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, to the third specific gaming state, which is a right-handing gaming state.
If the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the third specific gaming state, the third specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, continues.
Therefore, if the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the first to third specific gaming states, the right-handed gaming state continues, so that the processes of steps A1227a and A1229a may be omitted.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 196 is performed instead of the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 86.
Here, as shown in FIG. 84, in the jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set when the high-probability state is reached (step A1201). Then, when the data has a high probability (step A1201; Y), that is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in any of the normal gaming state and the first to third specific gaming states, the first specification It shifts to the game state.
That is, when the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is the probability variation big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 is performed to shift to the first specific game state.

Specifically, in the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231a), and the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step A1232a).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1237a), the high-probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A1238a), and the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area. The number inside is saved (step A1239a), and the process proceeds to step A1233. Since the processing of steps A1233 to A1235 is the same as that in FIG. 86, the description thereof will be omitted.
After the process of step A1235, the initial value of the time reduction variation number (50 in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the time reduction variation number region (step A1236a), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

By doing so, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data) after the end of the big hit game state, the hit probability is set to high probability and is usually used. With the electric support, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state.

Here, if the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the normal gaming state, the state shifts from the normal gaming state, which is the left-handed gaming state, to the first specific gaming state, which is the right-handing gaming state.
If the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the first specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, continues.
If the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, shifts to the first specific gaming state, which is a right-handing gaming state.
If the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the third specific gaming state, the third specific gaming state, which is a right-handed gaming state, shifts to the first specific gaming state, which is a right-handing gaming state.
Therefore, if the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot in the first to third specific gaming states, the right-handed gaming state continues, so that the processes of steps A1237a and A1239a may be omitted.

[Small hit medium processing]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit medium process shown in FIG. 197 is performed instead of the small hit medium process shown in FIG. 89. This small hit medium process differs from the small hit medium process shown in FIG. 89 in that the processes of steps A1405 and A1406 are not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a command for the small hit end screen is prepared regardless of whether or not the flag saved in the special figure game mode flag save area is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1407). , The effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed.

[Small hit end processing]
In order to realize the game state transition diagram shown in FIG. 182, in the present embodiment, the small hit end process shown in FIG. 198 is performed instead of the small hit end process shown in FIG. 93. In this small hit end process, first, the processes of steps A1601 to A1619 are performed. Since the processes of steps A1601 to A1619 are the same as those in FIG. 93, the description thereof will be omitted.
After the processing of step A1619, it is determined whether the flag loaded in step A1601 is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a), and if it is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; Y), , The process proceeds to step A1623.

On the other hand, if it is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N), the process proceeds to step A1620. Since the processes of steps A1620 to A1623 are the same as those in FIG. 93, the description thereof will be omitted. That is, in the present embodiment, the flag loaded in step A1601 is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1624a; N), and the flag loaded in step A1619 is not the flag related to the special figure time reduction (step). In A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622).
By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not shortened, the game shifts from the small hit game state in which the firing direction is right-handed to the normal game state in which the firing direction is left-handed. Can be made to.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a variable display game in which the identification information is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting area provided in the game area 32, and the variable display game can be executed. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to a player when the result is a special result, and a gaming ball launched toward the left side of the gaming area 32 can win a prize in the starting area. A gaming area including a first starting area (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting area (second starting winning opening 97) in which a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area 32 can win a prize. A retention device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37) for retaining the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the second starting region of the 32.

Therefore, since the retention device (normally variable winning device 37 in the case of this embodiment) is provided on the upstream side of the second starting region (second starting winning opening 97), in addition to the retention of the game ball in the retention device. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the whereabouts of the game ball retained by the retention device (whether or not the player wins the second starting area, etc.), and the effect of the retention device can be accurately improved. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the retention device is a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win by operating the movable member 37b, and a state in which the game ball can be won. It can be configured to be.
With this configuration, in addition to the retention of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37, the whereabouts of the game ball retained by the normal variable winning device 37 (normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting area (second start). It is possible to attract the attention of the player to which of the winning openings 97) to win, and the effect of the dwelling device (ordinary variable winning device 37) can be accurately improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the special game state, until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, the electric support state (time saving state) in which the game ball is more likely to win the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal state is set. The electric support control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and in the electric support state, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is substantially the same as the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. It can be configured to be set to.
With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the second starting area (second starting winning opening 97) in the electric support state (first specific gaming state or third specific gaming state). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball output rate).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a variable display game in which the identification information is changed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97). A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, and the opening / closing member 990 operates in response to the occurrence of the special gaming state. A variable winning device (in the case of this embodiment, a special variable winning device 38) capable of converting a game ball from a state in which it is impossible or difficult to win to a state in which the game ball can be won, and a variable winning device provided on the upstream side of the variable winning device. , A retention device for retaining the game ball (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37) is provided.

Therefore, since the retention device (in the case of this embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37) is provided on the upstream side of the special variable winning device 38, the game ball is retained by the retention device in addition to the retention of the game ball in the retention device. The whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not the special variable winning device 38 is won, etc.) can also attract the attention of the player, and the effect of the dwelling device can be accurately improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special gaming states include a first special gaming state (small hit gaming state) and a second special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. The variable winning device (in the case of the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 38) arrives after the game ball is launched, rather than the period from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the first special gaming state. It is possible to set the residence period (retention time) of the game ball in the retention device (in the case of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37) so that the period until is long.
With this configuration, regardless of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990 (opening pattern of the large winning opening), aiming such as starting to hit the game ball at the start of the first special game state (small hit game state) is performed. However, since the first special game state has ended by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, while improving the small hit performance (while increasing the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state), It is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an operation mode of the opening / closing member 990 in the first special gaming state (small hit gaming state), a variable winning device (in the case of the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 38) after the game ball is launched. ) Can be configured so that an operation mode capable of a plurality of operations can be selected.
With this configuration, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, the game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 by the guide member 34b provided in the normal drawing start gate 34 is a flow path of the normal variable winning device 37. It is guided to the left side (upstream side) of 37f. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the game ball flowing down the right game area passes through the retention device (normal variable winning device 37), it becomes more difficult to illegally win a prize by capturing the game in the normal game state, and the time is shortened. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball in.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to the retention device (normal variation winning device 37), members (obstacle nails, windmills, flow path 615, guide portion 616, etc.) that suppress the ball power, that is, the game ball retention. A retention member having a function is arranged. By retaining the game ball using the retention device and the retention member, the rolling mode of the game ball can be changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.
Of course, the arrangement of the retention device and the retention member can be appropriately selected. Specifically, the placement of the retention device and the retention member is such that the game ball is placed in the large prize opening even if the aim is to start hitting the game ball at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening). It is preferable that the arrangement does not win a prize (that is, an arrangement that prevents illegal winning by capture).

The variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be used.
Further, the retention device is not limited to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. A device for retaining the game ball by a slide member that can slide in the front-rear direction and the like, and a shaft support that can be rotated by a rotation shaft. Any structure as long as the game ball can be retained, such as a device for retaining the game ball by the seesaw member, a device for retaining the game ball by the rotating member rotatably supported by the rotating shaft, and the like. It may be. Further, the retention device is not limited to the one provided with a winning opening such as the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, a plurality of retention devices may be provided.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a special variable winning device 38 that converts the opening / closing member 990 from the closed state to the open state when the small hit gaming state is generated. The special variable winning device 38 is configured so that the game ball can stay on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, and stays on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. The game ball that has been played is configured to be able to win a prize. As a result, even in a small hit with a short open state, many game balls can be won by winning the special variable winning device 38 with the game balls staying in the opening / closing member 990, and in the second specific game state. It has a structure that can efficiently increase the number of balls.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small hit RUSH occurs in the second specific gaming state, the fluctuation is started every time the second starting winning opening 97 is won. As shown in FIG. 184, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set extremely high regardless of the low probability state or the high probability state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is set in the second specific game state. Fluctuations are set to short fluctuations. Therefore, small hit operations will occur one after another.
When a small hit game state occurs, it is possible to open the large winning opening a plurality of times for each small hit game state. When the large winning opening is opened multiple times per small hit game state, for example, during the small hit operation (during the small hit game state), the open state of the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 is in the closed state. It is set shorter than the time of. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), the closing time of the large winning opening is 1.0 second, whereas the opening time can be 0.5 seconds.

The special variable winning device 38 is configured to weaken the flow force of the game ball on the opening / closing member 990. As a result, the game ball tends to stay on the opening / closing member 990.
In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH in which small hits occur frequently occurs, if the closed state time of the big winning opening is set longer than the open state time, the closed state time is often increased. The game ball can be retained on the opening / closing member 990. After that, since the opening / closing member 990 is opened, many game balls staying on the opening / closing member 990 will win a prize at once in the large winning opening. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, many prize balls can be given to the player.
By doing so, in the probabilistic loop type gaming machine 10 as in the present embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. It is possible to realize a new game property that the more you fit, the more you can acquire a game ball.

When a small hit occurs in a predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of this predetermined variable display game, the game ball depends on the fluctuation period of the identification information in the next variable display game. It is possible to secure a period for ensuring the flow and retention of the water. As a result, when the small hit operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening / closing member 990 by utilizing the fluctuation time of the later game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening / closing member 990 can be made to win a prize at once in the large prize opening, and many prize balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the small hit mode (first special result) is derived. Since the transition to the possible second specific gaming state is possible, it is possible to perform a novel gaming state transition that has never existed before.
Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) to which a large number of small hits are allocated can be efficiently changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the hit is a small hit or a big hit, a notification effect for notifying the type of hit is executed before the symbol is fixed (the symbol is stopped). That is, it is configured to notify whether it is a small hit or a big hit before the symbol is stopped. As a result, the type of hit is notified at a common timing regardless of whether the hit is a small hit or a big hit, so that it is easy to understand the timing when the interest of the game is enhanced and the timing when the notification should be seen.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second specific game state (small hit RUSH mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect corresponding to a small hit (short effect) and a notice effect corresponding to a big hit (long effect). Therefore, the frequency of the production is higher in the advance notice production corresponding to the small hit, and the start timing of the production is earlier in the advance notice production corresponding to the big hit. Since the notice effect corresponding to the big hit has a longer production time than the notice effect corresponding to the small hit, the start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the big hit is the start of the notice effect corresponding to the small hit due to time adjustment etc. It's earlier than the timing. Further, if the frequency of the advance notice effect of the earlier start timing is increased, the player's interest in the fluctuation of the player may decrease at an early stage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advance notice effect of the later start timing (that is, , The frequency of the advance notice effect corresponding to the small hit) is higher than the frequency of the advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect corresponding to the big hit) at the earlier start timing.
In addition, as a so-called Gase effect, it is possible to execute a notice effect corresponding to a big hit and a notice effect corresponding to a small hit. In this case, for example, a notice effect corresponding to a big hit (Gase effect) → a small hit is supported. By executing the advance notice effect (the effect of the ghost) → the advance notice effect corresponding to the big hit (the effect that is not the ghost), it is possible to execute the advance notice effect that the player keeps paying attention to.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a type of game in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game fluctuate at the same time (the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long). It may be a machine. Furthermore, in the case of a simultaneous variable type gaming machine, in the game state of left-handed, if right-handed to win the second start winning opening 97 and the result of the game based on the winning is a big hit, a special effect ( It is also possible to execute an effect (such as a countdown effect or an effect of entering a special zone), that is, an effect other than an error notification effect (warning effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big hit in an unmanned state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 38 is configured to function as a large winning opening for a big hit and a large winning opening for a small hit, but a large winning opening for a big hit and a large winning opening for a small hit. And may be separated.
Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 170, the large winning opening 38d of the special variable winning device 38 is used as the large winning opening for small hits, and the general winning opening 35 and the flow path provided in the right gaming area. A second special variable winning device having a big winning opening for a big hit and an opening / closing member for opening and closing the big winning opening may be provided between the 615 and the 615. The opening / closing member having the second special variable winning device is, for example, a member that can slide in the front-rear direction, and at least the upper surface (the surface on which the game ball rolls / stays) of the opening / closing member is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction. Therefore, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member is longer than that in the case where the upper surface of the opening / closing member is made of a material having a low coefficient of friction.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special gaming states are the first special gaming state (small hit gaming state) and the second special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. A first variable winning device (special variable winning device) that includes at least (state) and can be converted from a state in which the gaming ball cannot win or is difficult to win in response to the occurrence of the first special gaming state to a state in which the gaming ball can win. 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device) that can convert the game ball from a state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win in response to the occurrence of the second special gaming state to a state in which the game ball can be won. The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have a retention function (game ball retention function) for retaining a game ball, and a second variable winning device is located upstream of the first variable winning device. It can be configured to dispose of a variable winning device.

With this configuration, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device) is provided on the upstream side of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38), so that the first variable winning device is provided. In addition to the retention of the game ball in the device, the retention of the game ball in the second variable winning device and the whereabouts of the game ball retained by the second variable winning device can also attract the attention of the player, and the retention device ( The effect of the second variable winning device) can be accurately improved.

The game ball retention function of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) is generated by providing a rising portion (which may be a undulating portion or undulating portion), that is, by providing unevenness on the surface. It is not limited to the function and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the game ball retention function of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device) is not limited to the function generated by using a material having a high friction coefficient, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the game ball retention function may be a function generated by combining a plurality of configurations. That is, for example, it may be a function generated by providing unevenness on the surface and using a material having a high friction coefficient.
Further, the arrangement of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device) can be appropriately selected.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a third variable winning device (for example, a normal variable) different from the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device). The third variable winning device is further provided with a winning device 37), and the third variable winning device includes a winning area (for example, a general electric winning opening 37d) in which a game ball can be won by operating an opening / closing member (for example, a movable member 37b), and a game ball. The opening / closing member has a retention area (for example, a detour 37g) for accumulating the slingshot, and the length of the period (the period from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 to the end of operation) in which the first variable winning device changes its state Can be configured to be less than or equal to the length of the period during which the movable member 37d operates (the period from the start of operation to the end of operation of the movable member 37d).

With this configuration, a second variable winning device (second special variable winning device) having a game ball retention function and a game are located upstream of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38). Since a third variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) having a ball retention function is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal winning due to capture in the normal gaming state.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 (c), the length of the period from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state to the end of operation is "1.8 seconds" or "3.5 seconds". Is set shorter than "5800 msec", which is the length of the period from the start of operation to the end of operation of the movable member 37d. That is, in the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 to the end of the operation in the small hit game state is less than the length of the period from the start of the operation of the movable member 37d to the end of the operation. The length of is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, it may be the length of the period from the start of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state to the end of the operation (or the length of the period obtained by adding the small hit remaining ball processing time to the time). ) May be the same as the length of the period from the start of operation to the end of operation of the movable member 37d.

Further, the residence time of the game ball in the first variable winning device, the residence time of the game ball in the second variable winning device, and the residence time of the game ball in the third variable winning device may all be the same. , All may be different, or any two may be the same and the other one may be different.
Specifically, for example, [1] the residence time is: 2nd variable winning device> 1st variable winning device ≥ 3rd variable winning device or 2nd variable winning device> 3rd variable winning device> 1st variable winning device. In the case, that is, when the residence time of the game ball in the second variable winning device is the longest, the second variable winning device is arranged in the middle of the right game area, so that the game ball rolls in the middle of the right game area. You can enjoy the movement. Further, when the combination of residence times is [1], the game is played by the second variable winning device located upstream of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) having a large winning opening for small hits. Since the ball can be retained for a long time, the timing at which the game ball arrives at the first conversion winning device can be delayed. The game ball that arrives at the first variable winning device immediately after the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends falls from the opening / closing member 990 before the operation of the opening / closing member 990 starts (the winning of the first variable winning device fails). ) Although it is highly possible, by delaying the timing at which the game ball arrives at the first conversion winning device by the second variable winning device, the number of game balls arriving at the first variable winning device immediately after the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends is reduced. Because it can be done, it is possible to get more balls in the small hit game state.

Further, for example, when [2] the residence time is the third variable winning device> the second variable winning device> the first variable winning device, the ball is less likely to be clogged. That is, it is more necessary to suppress the ball power on the upstream side than on the downstream side of the game area, and in the conventional gaming machine, more retention members (obstacle nails, windmills, etc.) are arranged on the upstream side to suppress the ball power. .. On the other hand, when the combination of residence times is [2], the residence time of the game ball in the third variable winning device arranged on the most upstream side is the longest, and the ball power on the upstream side is the third variable winning. Since it can be suppressed by the device and the number of staying members arranged only for suppressing the ball power can be reduced, the ball is less likely to be clogged. Further, when the combination of the residence time is [2], the game ball retention function of the second variable winning device and the third variable winning device located upstream of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) is used. Since it is possible to prolong the time until the game ball arrives at the first variable winning device, it is possible to more effectively prevent illegal winning due to capture in the normal game state.

Further, for example, when [3] residence time is the second variable winning device and the third variable winning device> the first variable winning device, the upstream side of the first variable winning device (special variable winning device 38). The game ball retention function of the second variable winning device and the third variable winning device in the above makes it possible to prolong the time until the game ball arrives at the first variable winning device. Unauthorized winning can be prevented more effectively.
Any of the above [1] to [3] can be adopted as a combination of residence times, and the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state (timing to open the large winning opening and the large winning prize) can be adopted according to the adopted combination. The time when the mouth is closed, etc.) is set.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 32 Game area 36 First start winning opening (start area, start area, first start area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (variable winning device, retention device)
37b Movable member (opening and closing member)
37b5 Extension part (ball power suppression part)
37b6 Left ridge (ball power suppression part)
37b7 Right ridge (ball power suppression part)
37d Fuden winning opening (winning area)
37f Flow path (flow path, first flow path)
37g detour (retention area, second flow path)
37g1 entrance (communication port)
37g2 exit (communication port)
38 Special variable winning device (variable winning device)
80 Game board body 97 2nd start winning opening (starting area, 2nd starting area)
100 Game control device (electric support control means)
371b Protruding part (guidance part)
373b Rear surface (mounting wall)
990 opening and closing member

Claims (1)

It is possible to execute a variable display game in which the identification information is changed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting area provided in the game area, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state to be granted
The starting area includes a first starting area in which a game ball launched toward the left side of the game area can win a prize, and a second starting area in which a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area can win a prize. , Including
The second starting area is not an area in which the game ball can be converted into a state in which it is impossible or difficult to win.
A retention means for retaining the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the game region on the upstream side of the second start region.
The retention means can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and a state in which the game ball can win, by operating a movable member having a flow path on the upper surface through which the game ball can flow down. Therefore, it is provided in the ordinary variable winning device in which the movable member operates in response to the result of the normal figure variable display game different from the variable display game.
The variable display game includes a first variable display game and a second variable display game having a higher probability of producing the special result than the first variable display game.
The first variable display game can be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting area.
The second variable display game can be executed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first variable display game can be executed based on the winning of a game ball to the ordinary variable winning device.

Images